JP2020171729A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a performance effect.SOLUTION: A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state includes performance executing means capable of executing a suggestion performance in which control to the advantageous state is suggested and the rate at which control to the advantageous state is higher than a predetermined performance. A title corresponding to the suggestion performance can be displayed, and a specific display different from the title can be displayed during execution of the suggestion performance. The game machine can execute: a suggestion performance in which a specific display is displayed in a normal mode and a special mode in different rates depending on the performance result of the suggestion performance; a suggestion performance in which the specific display is displayed in one mode; a suggestion performance in which the title is displayed in the normal mode and the special mode in different rates depending on the performance result of the suggestion performance; and a suggestion performance in which the title is displayed in one mode. Corresponding sound is output together with display of the title, and when the predetermined performance is executed, the title corresponding to the predetermined performance is not displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-2

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display area capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display area, the gaming state (game). The state of the machine. Therefore, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) is changed to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information in the variable display area, and the player changes each. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display area, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time predetermined from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display areas is displayed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium determined in advance is paid out according to the prize, and a specific prize is generated, the player sets the game state to the predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (so-called slot machine).

In addition, the game value means that the payout of the prize ball and the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine are advantageous for the player who can easily win the prize, and are advantageous for the player. It is to generate the right to become a state and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the effect symbol (identification information) started in the variable display area based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If it is done, a "big hit" will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display area, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left, middle, and right symbols) continue for a predetermined time and stop or shake in a state that matches the specific display result. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed because it is moving, scaled or deformed, multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sexuality continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed in the variable display area is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In addition, when a specific display related to the player's movement (for example, a button image imitating a push button) is displayed and the player's movement (for example, an operation on the push button) is detected, the predetermined condition is satisfied. There was something that judged and performed a predetermined effect. Further, there is a state in which a specific display is displayed and it is determined that a predetermined condition is satisfied without detecting the movement of the player (for example, an automatic determination mode), and the reliability of the jackpot in this state can be determined. Based on this, there were some that were different in the possibility of button operation and the display mode of the specific display (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-176470 (FIGS. 8 and 11)

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the production in the state where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied without detecting the movement of the player.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the effect of production.

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is an effect that suggests that the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state. The effect executing means is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect having a high ratio of being controlled by the above, and the effect executing means can display a title corresponding to the suggestion effect and is different from the title during execution of the suggestion effect. The specific display can be displayed, and the effect executing means controls the normal mode and the advantageous state from the normal mode at different ratios depending on which of the plurality of effect results the suggestive effect is. The suggestion effect in which the specific display is displayed in a special mode in which the specific display is displayed in a high proportion, the suggestion effect in which the specific display is displayed in one mode, and the effect result of the suggestion effect are among a plurality of effect results. The suggestion effect in which the title is displayed in a normal mode and a special mode in which the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that in the normal mode by a different ratio depending on which of the above, and the title is in one mode. The displayed suggestive effect can be executed, and the title includes a special title for notifying that the predetermined effect is controlled, and when the predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined effect corresponds to the predetermined effect. The feature is that the title is not displayed.
(Means 1) The other gaming machine is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a detecting means that can detect the movement of the player (for example, the push sensor 35B). ) And a display control means capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a button display) related to the movement of the player (for example, the button display is displayed by executing steps 132IWS4503, 132IWS4523, 132IWS4544 in the effect control CPU 120). Part), the specific effect executing means (for example, the part where step 132 IWS4518 in the effect control CPU 120 is performed), and the detection result by the detection means, which can execute the specific effect based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition after the display of the specific display. A first state (for example, normal mode) in which a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the above, and a second state (for example, auto mode) in which a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result by the detection means. A controllable state control means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that performs steps 132IWS3854 and 132IWS3858) and a special effect execution means that can execute a special effect in a mode that acts on a specific display in the second state (for example, effect control). The CPU 120 is provided with a portion that displays a character display in a manner such as pressing a button display by executing steps 132IWS4512 and 132IWS4532). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the display control means can display the specific display according to the first specific mode (for example, blue) and the second specific mode (for example, red), and in the second state, the second specific display can be displayed. There is a higher expectation that the special effect using the specific display of the specific mode will be controlled to an advantageous state than the case where the special effect using the specific display of the first specific mode is performed ( For example, the red button display may be more reliable in controlling to an advantageous state than the blue button display (see FIG. 10-22 (C)). According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the special effect is executed by using the specific display of the second specific mode.

(Means 3) In means 1 or means 2, the display control means displays a special display (for example, character display) that can act on the specific display in a first special mode (for example, blue) and a second special mode (for example, red). ), And in the second state, the special effect using the special display of the first special aspect is performed when the special effect using the special display of the second special aspect is performed. There is a higher degree of expectation for controlling to an advantageous state than in the case of (for example, the red character display has a higher degree of reliability for controlling to an advantageous state than the blue character display (FIG. 10-22 (D)). ))). According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the special effect is executed by using the specific display of the second special aspect.

(Means 4) In means 3, when a specific effect is executed in response to the special display acting on the specific display (for example, a display in which the character display acts on the button display is performed during the first valid period). When a specific effect is executed (see FIG. 10-23) and when a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display is executed (for example, the character display acts on the button display during the second valid period). There may be a case where the display is performed and the button color change display is executed (see FIG. 10-24). With such a configuration, attention can be paid to the type of effect performed when the special display acts on the specific display.

(Means 5) In the means 4, the special effect executing means can execute a special effect in which the special display acts on the specific display in the first state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a second normal destination in the normal mode. The reading notice can be executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to expect the execution of a special effect regardless of the controlled state.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to the means 5, the special effect executing means can execute the special effect in a plurality of types of effect modes having different expectations for controlling to an advantageous state (for example, effect control). The CPU 120 can display the character display in either an operation mode of two-handed push with high reliability for controlling the jackpot and one-handed push with low reliability for controlling the jackpot). Good. According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the production mode of the special production.

(Means 7) In any of means 1 to 6, the display control means can display a special display that can act on the specific display, and a first special mode that can act on the specific display (for example, a half-body character). And the second special aspect (for example, a character of the whole body) that does not act on the specific display may be able to display the special display. According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the special display changes from the second special mode to the first special mode.

(Means 8) In any of the means 1 to the means 7, the display control means can display a specific display by a plurality of types of display modes having different expectations for controlling to an advantageous state (for example, the effect control CPU 120). The button display can be executed in either the color of red, which has a high degree of reliability for controlling the jackpot, and the color of blue, which has a low degree of reliability for controlling the jackpot.) According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the display mode of the specific display.

(Means 9) In any of the means 1 to the means 8, the case where the specific display and the special display are displayed but the special effect is not executed (for example, when the second auto pre-reading notice is performed) is more specific. Control is performed at a higher rate than when the display and the special display are displayed and the special effect is executed (for example, when the first auto pre-reading notice is performed) (see FIG. 10-22 (A)). ) May be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by giving the player a sense of discomfort.

(Means 10) In any of the means 1 to the means 9, whether or not the hold storage means (for example, the hold storage buffer) capable of storing the information related to the variable display as the hold storage and the hold storage are controlled in an advantageous state based on the hold storage. (For example, the portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step S110) and whether or not to control in an advantageous state based on the reserved memory before the determination by the determination means. Based on the determination means (for example, the portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 132IWS1217 and 132IWS1228) and the determination result by the determination means, the special effect is executed before the variable display is started. Even if a pre-effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps 132IWS116, 132IWS4541 to 132IWS4550) that can execute a pre-effect (for example, continuous pressing display) in which the display acts on the specific display is provided. Good. With such a configuration, the player can be focused on the production for a long period of time.

(Means 11) A suggestion effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the means 1 to the means 10 are controlled in an advantageous state, and a suggestion effect. The title notification means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) is provided, and the title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect. (For example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)) may be used. According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(Means 12) In any of the means 1 to the means 11, the display control means can change the display mode of the specific display based on the special effect being performed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be used. Step 132 IWS4938 may be performed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the display mode of the specific display changes.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine with the frame for the game machine open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation processing and setting change processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process executed at the time of power-on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial roll determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table before a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect determination processing during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect determination table, the accessory effect effect determination table, and the light guide plate effect determination table during a big hit. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the decorative pattern prepared in advance. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern type determination table for big hit and the variation pattern type determination table for small hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern type determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit variation pattern determination table stored in ROM. It is explanatory drawing which shows the deviation variation pattern determination table stored in ROM. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a variable category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a variable category command. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production process at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of a start winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process executed as an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the look-ahead notice execution lottery table and the continuous pressing display execution lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the mode control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process in the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead notice execution processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode determination lottery table, the button color determination lottery table, and the character color determination lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display in the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display in the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display in the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure in the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure in the effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the image display apparatus in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the image display apparatus in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the image display apparatus in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the image display apparatus in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the image display apparatus in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the image display apparatus in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the image display apparatus in this embodiment.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the device including an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and the gaming state after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also called the high accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (Detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is measured based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Ends processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead advance notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effects signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. -2, The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the display result is "loss". The variation pattern of reach loss is PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the display result is "big hit". , PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super The order is higher in the order of reach B <super reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8-1 (A) and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 8-1 (A) shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively fueled and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typeface (Semi-cursive, regular script, etc.) of the title characters may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of production operation of feature unit 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing the effect control process process based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” stop to enter the reach mode. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction portion of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the image display device 5 has the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach A, which is confronted by, is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and in the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When the dialogue is displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (F). (Here, the character "SP reach B") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "Super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is changed. Be notified. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (G), the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the characters 31AK001 and 31AK006 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach B, which is confronted by, is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, Super Reach A (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) Then, in the introduction part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is notified, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made to have a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to identify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of super reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the title 31AK007 of super reach D (here, the character "SP reach D") is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the title of Super Reach D is notified by outputting the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy") from the speaker 8. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the Super Reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the reliability of the big hit of reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 8-2 (I) shows the same production contents as those in FIG. 8-2 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), the Super Reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D is executed. You may.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character "SP Reach E") is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. By doing so, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to displaying the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach having high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped to notify the title.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has passed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be notified after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be such that the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, and the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different as in this embodiment, or the display location may be different.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation degree suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expected degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expected degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, or the expected degree may be suggested. The numerical value corresponding to may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of stages of expectation may be increased. ..

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. The title display end timing may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of the effect.

Although the production operation of the reach effect of Super Reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) comes, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a determination effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), and as shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), the image 31AK013 is displayed. A definite decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative pattern that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified even during the reach production, the notification of the title is terminated before the determined production is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the determined production, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute the variable display during the reach effect of the super reach. , The method of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays a hold display, an active display, a character that is residently displayed during variable display, and a display related to mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of Super Reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to draw attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 8-4 As shown in (B), the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. It may be displayed. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the black star indicating the expectation degree was displayed from the beginning on the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008, but five white stars were displayed first, and the stage. It is also possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect that suggests the expectation by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 is expected to move. The effect of fitting into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and 8-5 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation suggestion display 31AK021, the black stars are highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has been completed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to 8-5, black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step, but the black stars are two. One or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Also, a half black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output. By doing so, the expectation suggestion effect becomes various and the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same image of the black star is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

8-5 (G) to 8-5 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to 8-5 (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and is expected. The effect of fitting into one of the white rhombuses of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and 8-5 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including suggestive effect) may be made different in the effect mode. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution rate of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's preference, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B). A development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the character "SP Reach C") is displayed. , The title of Super Reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to a title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is displayed. Is notified, and as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK030 changes to red is executed. In this way, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the advance notice effect or the development effect, which is controlled to the jackpot advantageous state and improves the expectation. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of a fluctuation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “miss”. As shown in Fig. 8-9 (A), the display color of the Super Reach title changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Those that change, those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of the change in the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine the changing timing. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or smaller than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode of the character's lines (for example, the display color of the lines) in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in Fig. 8-9 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach production are provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and in this order (ascending order). ), The reliability of the jackpot is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. If the display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the timing of each change between the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is completed.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be executable. Further, although the title notice and the dialogue notice are explained as being decided by the decision ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, the decision ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the decision ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. Good. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible production modes may be the same. By doing so, a unified notice effect can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title and the dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the decision results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or may be different from the title notice. The ratio of the dialogue notice and which production mode changes (the ratio of acting on which) may be different, or the ratio of changing to what color (how many stages) may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to which of the title and the dialogue will act when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of any one of the title and the dialogue is obtained according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the effect content in the character movement and the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player pays attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified, as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after notifying the title on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing so, the title and the expected degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expected degree suggestion display can be easily understood.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a advance notice effect (for example, a look-ahead advance notice effect), when a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) having different background images and effect modes in the image display device 5 is executed, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Eliminate enemies with a stick controller", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 1 of feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a deciding effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). 8-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the outcome of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is displayed according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

8-10 and 8-11 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), after the reach mode is set in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character character 31AK041. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and 8-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. The large button image changes to 31AK047.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before the predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is in the center portion as shown in FIG. 8-11 (K). Is enlarged and displayed to prompt the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, the image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and when an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability of is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation effect image with high reliability during the reach effect, so that the effect is improved and the player's expectation is increased. Can be maintained.

Although the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted in the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the reach effect shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 is omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, display of operation effect image, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

(Modification example 2 of feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title production, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the reliability of the jackpot when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red letters). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 notifies the speaker 8 to output a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 9 emits the light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 8-12 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 8-12 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 8-12 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is, for example, displayed small in the upper right corner of the screen and the character is displayed in the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the speaker 8 executes a notification to output a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 9 executes a notification to emit light. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters "Battle win!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and 8-12 (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation of feature 112IW)
Next, the feature unit 112IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a game machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 112IW003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 112IW003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 112IW003a, and when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the game machine frame 112IW003 and the glass. The door frame 112IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 112IW201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, the setting key 112IW051 for switching to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state described later, and the setting value such as the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting change state are changed. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is housed in the board case 112IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the board case 112IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 112IW201.

Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key 112IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 112IW051. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. Although the feature unit 112IW illustrates a form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), the substrate case 112IW201 is provided with a display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged in front of the board case 112IW201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the feature unit 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in this feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, the right end portion of the outer frame 112IW001a includes a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the board case 112IW201 from the back side is attached. The curity cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. Further, the security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the substrate case 112IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. As a result, the right side portion of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the game machine frame 112IW003 is open, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the game machine frame 112IW003 from the long piece 112IW500Ab. By separating them, the covering state of the long piece 112IW500Ab is released, and the operation becomes operable.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. While the state is maintained, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The set value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless the clerk of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) in the game field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate from between a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the two and the pachinko game machine 1. And the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may cause fraudulent acts such as changing the setting value. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A switches the setting with the setting key 112IW051. By maintaining the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is regulated, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered by the security cover 112IW500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 112IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, the status of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted, the seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

In the feature unit 112IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), and FIG. In addition to the display result judgment table (set value 3) shown in -4 (C) and the big hit type judgment table shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown) and the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown). Includes (not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 9-6, a normal figure display result determination table (not shown), a general figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the lowest payout rate and increasing values in the order of 1, 2 and 3 increasing the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3 the advantage increases stepwise. In this feature unit 112IW, the winning probability of a small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
9-4 (A) to 9-4 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result judgment table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. In the case of, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability (1/2) is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. You will win the prize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability than in some cases (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/300 for non-probability change, 1/30 for probability change). To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" and "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability than the case of "2" (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" and "2".

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (C). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (C) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but stop at the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in the case of the big hit winning probability, the small hit winning probability may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "1" is 1/100, the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "2" is designed to be 1 / 93.75. The probability of winning a small hit at the set value "3" may be set to 1 / 87.5.

Further, in a game machine without a small hit, the configuration shown by the feature unit 112IW may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (C). A big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the big hit judgment is made depending on whether the first special symbol is a variable display or the second special symbol is a variable display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit may be determined using separate tables depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer is the first or the second.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the case where the advantage is higher in the order of the set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3" is shown. For example, the order of the advantage is ranked according to the gaming state. May be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a game machine that is controlled to a high probability / high base state, maintains a high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs, and is configured to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this example, as shown in Fig. 9-4, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and a prize ball is likely to be obtained. In a specific game state (high probability / high base state in this example), unlike other game states, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). The value "1" may be set to have the highest advantage.

Further, for example, when applied to a game machine in which the probability change state ends based on the execution of the variation display of a predetermined number of times (probability change end number) after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state), the same probability change occurs. As for the number of ends, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) may be increased in the order of set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3".

The feature unit 112IW provides a total of three set values, 1 to 3, as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 9-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature unit 112IW, the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed). A common jackpot type determination table is used when the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. A table referenced to determine one.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), the determination values corresponding to the random numbers (MR2) for determining the jackpot type are assigned to each set value, but they are assigned to simplify the explanation. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. That is, the ratio of which of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C is determined for each set value is shown. The loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-7, which will be described later, are also actually assigned determination values corresponding to random numbers. To simplify, the percentage of assigned determination values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is "2", When the rate determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is "3", the determination value is assigned so that the rate determined for the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 112IW will be described with reference to FIG. 9-5 (B). In the feature unit 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been done.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12, the start of the jackpot gaming state is started. This is the period during which the fanfare effect is executed as the effect effect to be notified.

The interval period is, for example, a period during which the post-opening process of the jackpot in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and is next after the round of opening the jackpot on the effect control board 12 side is completed. This is the period during which the interval effect is executed as the effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period to be done.

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, then the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the jackpot type C is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determining the jackpot type A is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". In the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ", the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period is also configured to be longer. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the game is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming too high.

This feature unit 112IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a jackpot game, and this jackpot suggestion effect is performed during a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the interest of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be enhanced. In addition, by directing the player's attention to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot can be hit. When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the setting is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long period is set increases in the order of the jackpot types A <B <C. As a result, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

In the feature unit 112IW, in any of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are characterized by a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 112IW). It ends when the figure game is executed or when the special figure game is entered into the jackpot game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time reduction control and the probability variation control is different for each jackpot type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state. The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the percentage of jackpots is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability change continues for each set value. The rate (consecutive villa rate) may be different.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and the probability variation control, the number of controls, etc.) between the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, and the fanfare period and interval. The average period of the period and the ending period is configured to be different, but for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and probability variation control, and the number of controls are different for each jackpot type, and the advantage is different. You may do so. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

It should be noted that the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a form in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined at a different ratio from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value set, one of the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C cannot be determined. There may be more than one. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Included in determining by percentage.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are different depending on the jackpot type is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to the jackpot type. It may be configured so that the period is different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to any of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed according to any of the set values "1" to "3", and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. You may.

In this way, in this feature unit 112IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

In the feature unit 112IW, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, and the jackpot type C as the jackpot type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs depending on the big hit type. When the property (so-called V probability variation type) is set and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the high base is medium (time reduction control). In the middle), the game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) may be set in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

Further, in the case of changing the game playability according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is passed through the effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to the probabilistic state or the jackpot gaming state based on passing through the count switch).

(Variation pattern judgment table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". A small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table used when is pre-determined and a loss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss" are prepared in advance. ..

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 9-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 112IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to the execution of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) and the other period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period). Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and is configured to use a different loss fluctuation pattern determination table.

Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 9-6 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined using the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 112IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to the time when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) is set as a special period, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be set by using a real-time clock or the like as long as it is in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). In addition, the period until the first big hit may occur may be a special period.

In the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and 9-6, normal reach loss and super reach loss are obtained in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, since the execution rate of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value is suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

Further, the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), and further, a set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that the motive for playing the game in the special period is Can be given and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern among them) is determined at the same ratio regardless of the difference in the set value (or the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do so. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

Further, the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and 9-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss, depending on the set value, at times other than non-reach loss. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), the ratio of normal reach loss increases remarkably in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" (this example). Then, it increases by 5%). Specifically, in the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), the normal reach loss is in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". The ratio of is slightly higher (in this example, it is increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In this feature unit 112IW, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value, but this depends on the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss as a whole depending on the set value. This is a concept that includes that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that only normal reach loss has different execution ratios depending on the set value.

The feature unit 112IW displays a common background image in the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and 9-6 (B) is used. Then, the effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the set value is set to any of 1 to 3, the image display device 5 displays a common background image and displays the effect symbol in a variable manner. It should be noted that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game interest during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature unit 112IW, and for example, a special variation pattern suggesting a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation display mode of the effect symbol is different from the usual one and the set value is 1 or 2) (Selected only in) may be provided so that the special variation pattern can be selected only in a special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period and enhance the interest of the game.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 112IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are provided, and when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be one of non-reach loss A to C. It is configured in. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 may include non-reach loss A to C, and any of non-reach loss A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss. It may be configured to determine the table.

As shown in FIG. 9-7, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is "2". When the value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Judgment value is assigned to.

In the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured so that the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the average fluctuation time is different by changing the ratio of non-reach loss A to C having different fluctuation times depending on the set value. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the fluctuation time is different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. When multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the fluctuation time is different, the time of the shaking display of the effect symbol and the time of the high-speed fluctuation display may be different for the effect, etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in appearance.

Further, in the present feature unit 112IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different according to the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the final effect symbol (final) is determined according to the set value. The period during which the stop symbol) is displayed as a stop may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the period during which the final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. , It is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the fluctuation time is set for each of the non-reach loss A to C, and the ratio of which of the non-reach loss A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration. Is fixedly set, and the fluctuation time may be longer when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set higher.

The feature portion 112IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening the variation time, which is shorter than other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds), which is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds), is provided. Then, this variation pattern for shortening is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is eliminated and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is the purpose. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Therefore, in the feature unit 112IW, the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or more than a predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 112IW, the variation time may be different depending on the set value for the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In this feature unit 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning opening (large winning opening, second major winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening) It is possible to perform aggregation and calculate various winning information such as the continuous ratio, the winning ratio, and the base based on the aggregation.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 (A) and 9-8 (B), the display monitor 112IW029 has the first display unit 112IW029A, the second display unit 112IW029B, the third display unit 112IW029C, and the fourth display unit 112IW029A. It includes a display unit 112IW029D and a fifth display unit 112IW029E. The first display unit 112IW029A to the fifth display unit 112IW029E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 112IW029A to the fifth display unit 112IW029E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in a very short cycle.

The display monitor 112IW029 displays each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 9-8 (B). The aggregated set values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A of the first digit, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B of the second digit and the third display unit 112IW029C of the third digit. Then, the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the fourth display unit 112IW029D of the fourth digit and the fifth display unit 112IW029E of the fifth digit. In the display No. 1, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 2, the short-term combination ratio is displayed. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in display No. 5, a base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No. 6, a base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. When the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. If so, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, "A7." Is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E, and the total cumulative ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit "B6." Is displayed on the 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the main board 11 (CPU103) controls the display monitor 112IW029 to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 9-9 (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), when the display on the display monitor 112IW029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-1), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-2), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-3), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 112IW029D and the 5th display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the total cumulative ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative winning combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-4), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 112IW029D and the 5th display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "L." are displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "6." are displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E display the base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. Further, as for the display color, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 112IW029 switches between the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds for display.

Furthermore, the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed in FIGS. 9-9 (A) and 9-9 (B-1) to 9. As shown in -9 (B-6), based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, and base when the set value is "1". 1. Display of base 2, short-term connection ratio when the set value is "2", short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, display of base 1 and base 2, when the set value is "3" It is possible to sequentially change the display of short-term consecutive ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2. If the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "1", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 112IW029A is updated to "2", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "2".

If the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "2", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 112IW029A is updated to "3", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "3".

Then, when the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "3", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 112IW029A is updated to "1", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "1".

In the feature unit 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this and displays. The monitor 112IW029 may be able to display only a numerical value of 1 or only a numerical value of any 2 of these ratios, combination ratios, and bases.

In addition, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 112IW029 may display the history of the number of prize balls given without calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Good.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, only the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 112IW029, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW will be described. 9-10 and 9-11 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature unit 112IW. In the feature unit 112IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the effect control means to start for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) starts when the power supply to the game machine is started. Set the timer (step 112IWS003). In this case, the effect control means activation waiting timer is set with a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the game machine to the activation of the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004 and the processes of steps 112IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS003 to S005, the processes after step 112IWS006 are executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and recovery processes are executed. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 clears, for example, a factory-factory setting flag indicating that the RAM 102 is still set at the factory-shipped (for example, this flag is cleared even if the RAM clearing processes 1 and 2 and the recovery processing described later are executed. (Cleared when the setting change process described later is executed) is set so that it is not set, and in step 112IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not this factory default setting flag is set. do it. Not limited to such an embodiment, for example, a value indicating that the product is shipped from the factory (for example, "0" or "-") is set as a set value, and the value of the set value is set in step 112IWS006. May be checked to see if is still at the factory default. If the factory default settings are used (step 112 IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 112IWS006; Yes), that is, if the set value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is stored (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112 IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. Whether or not it is determined (step 112 IWS008). In step 112 IWS008, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112 IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 112IWS009; No), that is, if a power failure occurs during the setting value change and the power supply to the game machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). The CPU 103 may control the display monitor 112IW029 to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating that a RAM error has occurred.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process (step 112IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, in the storage area of the RAM 102, an area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base as shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9 is used. It is cleared, and information for performance display such as connection ratio, combination ratio, and base is not cleared and is retained. Further, in the RAM clear 1 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS027.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is off (N in step 112IWS011), when the setting key 112IW051 is off (N in step 112IWS012), or when the output signal from the clear switch is off (N in step 112IWS012). In step 112IWS013 N), the process does not shift to step 112IWS014, but shifts to loop processing.

When the processes of steps 112IWS006 to S014 are executed, the backup RAM is not normal in the feature unit 112IW (N in steps 112IWS007 and S008), or the settings for factory default are left as they are (step 112IWS007, S008). In the case of 112IWS006 Y), if a power failure occurs during the setting change (Y in step 112IWS009), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 open. The RAM is cleared on the condition that the setting value can be changed after step 112IWS027. On the other hand, unless the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the game control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process start command indicating that the setting confirmation process is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS018). When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation process start command, it controls to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 112 IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped by the same process as in step S6. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process end command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS016) or when the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S6. (Step 112IWS022) is performed to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 by the same process as in step S7 (step 112IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 112IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 processing, of the storage areas of the RAM 102, the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base as shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9, and the set value. The area other than the area for storing is cleared, and the performance display information such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the set value information are not cleared and are retained.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS025). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS026). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets the setting changing flag (step 112IWS027).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change processing start command indicating that the setting change processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS028). When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting change processing start command, it controls to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process (step 112IWS029).

When the setting change process is completed, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 112IWS030). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). Further, a setting change processing end command indicating that the setting change processing is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS025) or when the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S9. Therefore, an effect control command instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

In the feature unit 112IW, the processing of steps IWS034 to S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

Next, the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019) will be described. FIG. 9-12 (A) is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSA01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSA02). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA03). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSA02, and the processes of steps 112IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the game machine frame 112IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation error process (step 112IWSA04). Then, the process shifts to loop processing. In step 112IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that a setting confirmation error occurs, and execute the setting confirmation error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board mounted on the game machine. Further, in this example, when the setting confirmation error processing is executed, the process shifts to the loop processing, and then the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the processing does not proceed.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA05). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation process ends.

Next, the setting change process (step 112IWS029) will be described. FIG. 9-12 (B) is a flowchart showing a setting change process (step 112IWS029).

In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (step 112IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (Y in step 112IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the setting value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB03). For example, when "1" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display of the display monitor 112IW029 is updated to "2", and "2" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 112IW029. The display of the display monitor 112IW029 may be updated to "3", and when "3" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display of the display monitor 112IW029 may be updated to "1". Further, the CPU 103 stores the set value (updated set value) displayed on the display monitor 112IW0029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updates and stores the set value already stored) (step 112IWSB04).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSB05). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB06). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB02, and the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the game machine frame 112IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed.

If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes the setting change error processing (step 112IWSB07). Then, the process shifts to loop processing. In step 112IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that a setting change error occurs, and the setting change error notification may be executed based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board mounted on the game machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error processing is executed, the process shifts to the loop processing, and then the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the processing does not proceed. In this case, since the setting changing flag is still set in step 112IWS027, the RAM clear 1 process is executed after the power is turned on again (see Y and 112IWS014 in step 112IWS009). The error state will be cleared.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB08). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

FIG. 9-13 is an explanatory diagram showing a process executed when the power is turned on. In this feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIG. 9-13, when the setting key 112IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (furthermore, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting change process (step 112IWS005-S010) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS015-S017) is executed. If the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the recovery process (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is off. Will be executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-14 (A) and 9-14 (B), when the power is turned off (power is cut off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. If the big winning opening is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing when the power is turned off, the big winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (C), when the clerk of the game hall or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set to, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (D), the CPU 103 each time it detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by a clerk of the amusement park or the like. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated, it is updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ...).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (E), the CPU 103 sets the set value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 to the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 112IW051 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like. Store (update storage) in the backup area of. At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 112IW029 to notify the clerk of the amusement park that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. When the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big prize opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 9-14 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear process is executed when the setting is changed. As the memory of the jackpot is erased, the jackpot remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state where the game can be played, that is, a state in which the fluctuation display result, the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern determination lottery, the prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change process in the feature unit 112IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 112IW), or the most advantageous for the player. The set value (“3” in the case of this feature unit 112IW) may be displayed.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the feature unit 112IW will be described. 9-15 and 9-16 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved storage number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) (step 112IWS101). For example, the count value of the total pending storage counter for counting the total pending storage is checked.

If the total number of pending storages is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second number of reserved storages is 0 (step 112IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed on the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed on the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 112 IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 112IWS104).

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS102 to S104, in the feature unit 112IW, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed according to the starting winning order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. And may be configured to execute.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 112IWS105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 112IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter, and determines each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is placed in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total reserved storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step 112IWS107). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 112 IWS108). As described above, in the feature unit 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed at the time of turning on the power by executing the process of step 112IWS031, but even after the power is turned on, the step The setting value command is transmitted every time the variation display is started by executing the process of 112IWS108.

Even if the same fluctuation pattern is used, if different fluctuation pattern commands are sent for each set value, the total number of fluctuation patterns x the number of set values (3 in this example) of fluctuation pattern commands are required. Therefore, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, even if the set value command is transmitted only when a specific fluctuation pattern is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern is provided with the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the set value. Good. In this case, for example, the setting value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern command for the number of the set value. May be provided.

Further, in this example, the case where the same setting value command is transmitted by the setting value command (see step 112IWS031) transmitted at the time of turning on the power and the setting value command (see step 112IWS108) transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown. It is not limited to any mode. For example, even if the setting value command for power-on and the setting value command for fluctuation start are configured as separate commands, different setting value commands are sent at power-on and fluctuation start. Good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command is shown at the start of fluctuation, but it is configured to transmit the effect control command that is used as both the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. May be good. In this case, for example, even if the fluctuation pattern command specifies the same fluctuation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and if the set value is "3", the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 side is configured to output which set value. It may be configured so that which fluctuation pattern is selected and the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the fluctuation pattern A-2 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-2 is high. The variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate if the setting value is 3. In this case, for example, the fluctuation patterns A-1 to A-3 may be configured so that the fluctuation time is the same, but the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of reach, and the type are different. Further, in this case, for example, when the setting value command is not normally received, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the setting value command is not normally received, the dedicated selection ratio is selected. It may be configured to select a fluctuation pattern with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current gaming state (step 112IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 controls to send a probability change state background specification command in the case of a probability change state, and controls to transmit a time reduction state background specification command in the case of a time reduction state, which is a normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background specification command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see Fig. 9-4) with the random number value MR1, and if they match, decides to make a big hit or a small hit. It is a program to be executed. That is, it is a program that executes processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

If the value of the random number MR1 does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 112IWS111). Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 112IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 112IWS112), and proceeds to step 112IWS116.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step 112IWS111), that is, if it is out of the range, the process proceeds to step 112IWS116 as it is.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 9-5) to correspond to the type corresponding to the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A”). , "Big hit type B" or "Big hit type C") is determined as the big hit type (step 112IWS114).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS115). For example, when the jackpot type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 112IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the jackpot flag is set, "7", which is the jackpot symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, it may be determined to be a different special symbol stop symbol depending on the jackpot type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5", which is the small hit symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 112IWS117).

(Production mode change process)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the feature unit 112IW will be described. FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control main processing in the feature unit 112IW. In the feature unit 112IW, in the effect control main process, when the effect control random number update process of step S77 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change process (step 112IWS201) to change the effect mode, and then executes the effect mode change process. The process returns to step S73.

The feature unit 112IW can control three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the advance notice and reach effects are different. In the effect mode change process of step 112 IWS201, the effect control CPU 120 controls to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the real-time clock is mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect mode may be changed based on the predetermined date and time based on the date and time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 112IW201, when the effect mode is changed, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, set a flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change and reset the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change. For example, when the effect mode A is changed, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to B, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to C, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

The production mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A → ... It may be changed at random from modes A to C.

(Command analysis processing)

FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 112IWS301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 112IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 112IWS303). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 112IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 112IWS305). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power is turned on to the game machine (step 112IWS306).

In the feature unit 112IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by power supply, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area supply power to the game machine. Is cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the game machine is started, no set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, and the process is started with the set value command reception flag cleared. To. Since the effect control board 12 is started in a state where the set value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when the setting confirmation process or the recovery process is executed. It may be configured so that the set value command is always sent when the power is turned on.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the set value command is transmitted when the power is turned on to the game machine and the setting change process is performed, but the set value command is normally performed due to missing command or garbled data. If the data cannot be received in, the process of step 112IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature unit 112IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each fluctuation display, so that the process of step 112IWS305 is performed based on the set value command received thereafter. It is executed and the setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

Further, even if the setting value command is received, the setting value included in the setting value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when reading the setting value command on the effect control CPU 120 side, the setting value command is used. It may be configured to determine whether or not the included set value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the set value is configured to be set to any of "1" to "3", but includes values such as "5" and "10" that should not be set. If this is the case, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 side stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and then when a new set value command is received, the newly received set value command is used. If the set value shown does not match the set value stored last time, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and it may be determined that the setting value is abnormal. Then, even if it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command has not been received normally, and the effect is restricted according to the processing method shown by the feature unit 112IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial roll setting)
When the effect control board 12 side receives any of the initialization designation command, the recovery command, the setting change processing end command, and the setting confirmation processing end command from the main board 11 in the command analysis process, the feature unit 112IW receives. , The image display device 5 controls to display a predetermined initial result (specifically, a combination of effect symbols displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started). Perform (hereinafter, also referred to as initial roll production).

If the received effect control command is a setting change process end command (step 112IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS308). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the setting change process is executed and the set value command is received normally), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value, the initial roll determination table is used to use a combination of even initial rolls (for example, "246" and "224"), which is a combination of even numbered effect symbols, and an odd number of effect symbols. It is determined to be one of an odd initial number (for example, "135" or "113") and a special initial number which is a combination of a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) (step 112IWS309). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

FIG. 9-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table. In step 112 IWS309, a lottery process based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the set value stored in the set value storage area using the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 9-19 (A), and the initial result is performed. Determine the outcome. In the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 9-19 (A), the ratio of odd initial rolls determined is higher in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Therefore, if the odd-numbered initial rolls are displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, the setting value is advantageous as compared with the case where the setting has been changed and the even-numbered initial rolls are displayed. It will be suggested that it is set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (A), the special initial result may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is "3". With such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game and to give a motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 112 IWS310). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 9-19 (A) assuming that the set value is "1" (step 112IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

By executing the process of steps 112IWS310 to S311, the feature unit 112IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. The initial roll is determined as being "1". As shown in FIG. 9-19 (A), with respect to the set value "1", the ratio of the odd initial rolls determined is the lowest, and the special initial rolls are not determined. By configuring in such a way, it is possible to reduce the situation where an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed to disappoint the player even though an unfavorable setting value is set, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS312). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result using the initial result determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

FIG. 9-19 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 9-19 (B), in the initial roll determination table for the effect mode C, an odd initial roll is determined as compared with the case of the setting value "3" which is the most advantageous for the player. The ratio is low, and it may not be determined as a special initial roll.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS312 to S313, the feature unit 112IW sets a disadvantageous setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the odd initial rolls and special initial rolls are displayed to reduce the situation in which the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial rolls determined in steps 112IWS309, S311 and S313 (step 112IWS314).

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result to be an even initial number, and the image display device 5 In, control is performed to display even initial rolls (step 112IWS315).

By executing the process of step 112IWS315, the feature unit 112IW uniformly displays an even initial number when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the situation where an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed to disappoint the player even though an unfavorable setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the odd-numbered initial roll symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, an initial roll is used by using a table in which the determination ratio of the odd initial roll symbol is set lower than the set value "1" of the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 9-19 (A). It may be configured to determine the eye pattern.

In this example, the case where the even initial number is uniformly displayed when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode B is set is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode B is set, and the set value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of "???" symbols as the initial result. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial roll. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest a set value in some form may be displayed as an initial result.

In addition, the processing when the setting value command cannot be received normally (or when the setting value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, when N is determined in step 112IWS308, the set value "1" may be stored in the set value storage area as a default to determine the initial outcome. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value "4") indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial result. May be good.

If the received effect control command is either an initialization specification command, a recovery command, or a setting confirmation process end command (step 112IWS316), that is, if the setting change process is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 , The initial roll is determined to be an even initial roll, and the image display device 5 controls to display the even initial roll (step 112IWS317). In the feature unit 112IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial roll is determined as the even initial roll and is not determined as the odd initial roll, but the even initial roll is determined by lottery. It may be determined as either an eye or an odd initial result. In this case, the determined ratio may be different depending on the set value.

If the received effect control command is a RAM error notification command (step 112IWS318), the effect control CPU 120 executes RAM error notification (step 112IWS319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as "a RAM error error has occurred" in the image display device 5, or outputs a sound or an error sound indicating a RAM error error from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the RAM error abnormality notification is performed, the maximum volume sound or error sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and LED are emitted with the maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full-color LED). It is desirable to make it emit light in white.

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 112IWS320). For example, if the received effect control command is a variation pattern command, the received variation pattern command is stored in the variation pattern command storage area provided in the RAM 122, and the variation pattern command reception flag is set. Further, for example, if the received effect control command is a display result designation command, the received display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area provided in the RAM 122. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS301.

Note that the feature unit 112IW is configured so that the odd initial roll is not displayed when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, but even if the odd initial roll can be displayed. Good. Further, also in this case, the ratio determined by the odd initial number may be different depending on the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

Further, for example, in place of or in addition to the odd initial roll and the even initial roll, an initial roll that denies the possibility of a specific set value (for example, the possibility of the set value 1 is denied and is set. (It is determined that the value is 2 or the set value 3), an initial result that is determined to be a specific set value, or the like may be provided so that the value is displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied when the specific initial result is displayed by preventing the determination of the specific initial result, and the set value 2 or It will be confirmed that the set value is 3. Further, for example, by setting a specific initial roll to be determined only in the case of the set value 3, it is confirmed that the set value is 3 when the specific initial roll is displayed. .. Further, at the time of determining the initial outcome, one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the determined ratio may be different depending on the set value.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the feature unit 112IW, the set value can be changed, and as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, and the game (for example, during the game). , The suggestion effect during the game executed during the change display of the effect symbol, the setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern, and the suggestion effect during the big hit executed during the big hit (for example, during the big hit game) can be executed. Has been done. In the feature unit 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes in which the reliability of the suggestion is different. The reliability of the suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> jackpot suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect, or in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect> jackpot suggestion effect. The reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of suggestion effect during game> suggestion effect during big hit> suggestion effect during pre-game, or suggestion effect during jackpot> suggestion effect during game> suggestion effect during pre-game. Further, the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect may be set to be set. For example, the manager of the game machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the initial appearance effect suggesting that the setting has been changed), or the execution ratio. It may be possible to change the setting so as to lower (or raise). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operation means such as the push button 31B or the operation means (operable only by the administrator) such as the switch provided inside the game machine. May be changed.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 is set with a variable start command reception flag (for example, a variable pattern command reception flag) indicating that a command or the like for designating the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Whether or not it is confirmed (step 112 IWS401).

When the variable start command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the effect waiting demo effect if it is being executed (step 112IWS402, step 112IWS403). Then, the variable start command reception flag is reset (step 112IWS404), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 112IWS405), and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

If the fluctuation start command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition unless the customer waiting demo effect is being executed (N in step 112IWS406). (Step 112 IWS407). In step 112IWS407, for example, when the timer set when the previous variable display (display result "loss") ends (for example, set in 30 seconds) times out, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, even when the timer is not set (that is, when the fluctuation display is not executed even once after the power is turned on and before the start of the game), it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, when the variable display is not executed and a predetermined period elapses (and the jackpot game state is not controlled), or when the game is not started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demo effect is produced by the process described later. Will be executed.

If the timing result by the timing means matches a predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 (step 112IWS408). That is, in step 112IWS408, it is confirmed whether the game has not started yet.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112 IWS409). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed according to the set value (step 112IWS410). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

In the feature unit 112IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is changed to the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demo effect is controlled and includes the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the decorative lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the including aspect is executed, the decorative lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

FIG. 9-21 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 112 IWS410, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 9-21 (A), a lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area. Whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the mode of the effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 9-21 (A), determination values are assigned so that the ratio of pre-game suggestion effects executed increases in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Has been done. Further, the determination values are assigned so that the ratio of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" in which the second effect mode is determined increases. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed, and that the pre-game suggestion effect is set to an advantageous set value by being executed by the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the set value is "3".

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 112 IWS411). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the set value is "1", and whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 9-21 (A). And the production mode is determined (step 112 IWS412). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS411 to S412, the feature unit 112IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIG. 9-21 (A), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode is the lowest, and the third effect mode may not be determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest in games.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112 IWS413). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS414). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

FIG. 9-21 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 9-21 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed as compared with the case of the set values "2" and "3". The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined to be the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode may not be determined.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS413 to S414, the feature unit 112IW sets a disadvantageous set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player on the contrary is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect in the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 112IWS410, S421, and S414 (step 112IWS415). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 112IWS416 as it is. That is, in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 112IWS413, the feature unit 112IW does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and is in the effect mode B. It is possible to reduce the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and disappoint the player even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution rate of the pre-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 9-21 (A), before the game is used. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and type of suggestive effect.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 9-21 (A), only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed so that the execution ratio differs depending on the set value. It may be.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1, is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is the set value 2 or the set value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In the feature unit 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and second effect mode) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the pre-game suggestion effect is not executed when the setting value is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not yet been received. Not limited to this, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executed even when the setting has not been changed. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed at different ratios depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

For example, FIG. 9-21 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a command at the time of restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 9-21 (A) with the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 9-21 (C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change is made. When it is not performed, the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed is lower than when the setting is changed, and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is also smaller. By doing so, it is possible to make the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect different between when the setting is changed and when it is not changed.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect in the mode including the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 112IWS416). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

When the process of step 112 IWS416 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, the execution history indicating the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (in-game suggestion effect or jackpot suggestion effect), the execution content (execution mode), and the like. A customer-waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 112IWS416 is executed, the customer waiting de effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, The image display device 5 may display the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, the number of executions and the execution contents (effect mode at the time of execution) of the setting suggestion effect (initial roll effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect, etc.) are shown. The information may be stored, and the effect of estimating the set value from the information and notifying the setting value may be executed. It should be noted that this effect notifies the setting expectation degree (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined standard from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, and does not notify the actual setting value. ..

In the feature unit 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 112IWS408 to 112IWS415. Further, the process of step 112IWS416 shows the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect during the customer waiting demo effect, but the information about the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the pachinko game machine 1 interested in the state before the start of the game and to give the motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, which can enhance the interest. .. Not limited to the example of the feature unit 112IW, for example, a real-time clock or the like is used so that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). May be good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include the information regarding the suggestion effect during the game in the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the feature unit 112IW, the number of executions and the execution contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game. It may be configured to do so. Further, when the player takes a picture of the two-dimensional code displayed on the game machine using a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function and sends it to a Web server on the Internet, the Web server based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined privilege may be performed according to the game history. Further, the player may access the Web server (or analyze the two-dimensional code) using the mobile terminal to acquire the execution history information and display it on the display device provided in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may use the mobile terminal to read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information so that the setting suggestion image suggesting the set value is displayed on the display device provided in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined standard is calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image suggesting the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. You may.

(Proposal decision processing during the game)
FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the suggestion effect determination process during the game. The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, when the effect control CPU 120 is in the special period (Y in step 112IWS501), it selects the first in-game suggestion effect determination table (step 112IWS502) and is not in the special period. In the case (N of step 112IWS501), the suggestion effect determination table during the second game is selected (step 112IWS503). For example, when a setting change end command or a setting value command is received, a special period flag is set, and when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by confirming the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm in step 112IWS501 whether or not the special period is in progress.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS504). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed (step 112IWS505).

FIG. 9-23 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 9-23 (B) is a second in-game suggestion effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table.

In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-23 (A) and 9-23 (B), the in-game suggestion effect is executed in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the game.

Further, regarding the second production mode (appearance of mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the first production mode (appearance of mini character A). Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in execution ratio between the set values is larger than that. That is, there is a high degree of reliability that the second effect mode is set to a set value that is more advantageous than the first effect mode.

Further, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-23 (A) and 9-23 (B), the in-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode with high reliability is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 (A) and 9-23 (B), the third effect mode (character C appearance) may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the game according to the third effect mode.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 112IWS506). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1". Step 112 IWS507).

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS506 to S507, the feature unit 112IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 9-23 (A) and 9-23 (B), with respect to the set value "1", the ratio of determining that the suggestion effect is executed during the game is low, and the ratio determined as the second effect mode is low. Is the lowest and may not be determined as the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest in games.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS508). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS509).

FIG. 9-23 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 9-23 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the set value "3". , It may not be determined as the third effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS508 to S509, the feature unit 112IW sets a disadvantageous setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the situation in which the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player on the contrary is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is. That is, in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect is not executed during the game.

By executing the process of step 112IWS508, the feature unit 112IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the game when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect is executed during the game and disappoint the player even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the game may be made executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the in-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the in-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 9-23 (A) and 9-23 (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of suggestive effect during the game.

Not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 9-23 (A) and 9-23 (B), only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1, is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is the set value 2 or the set value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In this feature unit 112IW, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect during the game at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the suggestion effect during the game (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

It should be noted that the feature unit 112IW is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect during the game in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. , It may be possible to execute a suggestion effect during the game in a different mode. For example, the size, color, and the like of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

Further, the feature unit 112IW is configured so that whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode when the suggestion effect is executed are different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern, the presence / absence of reach effect, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous effect, the type of pseudo-continuous effect, and the display result are big hits. Depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game, the effect mode when the suggestion effect is executed may be different.

For example, the suggestion effect during the game may be executed only when the variation pattern includes the reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the super reach B and the fluctuation pattern including the super reach A having a higher expectation than the super reach B, the latter is more likely to execute the suggestion effect during the game. Or, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, the ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed is high, and the reliability when the suggestion effect is executed is high. It may be made higher.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the pseudo-ream effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-ream effect (or the number of pseudo-reams is smaller than that of the former), the former has a higher ratio of the suggestion effect being executed during the game. It may be set to be high, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, or the rate when the suggestion effect during the game is executed is high and when it is executed. The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of the suggestion effect being executed during the game. The reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high, or the ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed may be high, and the reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high. ..

(Production decision processing during big hit)
FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process during the big hit. The big hit middle effect determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit middle effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS601). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit, and the effect mode when the effect is executed are determined (step 112IWS602). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

In step S112IWS602, when the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the number shown in FIG. One jackpot suggestion effect determination table is selected, and if it is not during a specific period, the second jackpot suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 9-25 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table and the set value, it is determined whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the previous consecutive villa. It may be the time when the display is started, or the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demo production. Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as a specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as a specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (the 51st variation after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a jackpot suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the jackpot suggestion effect and the determination rate of the effect mode are different depending on the period from the display to the execution of the 100th variation display).

In the first and second jackpot suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-25 (A) and 9-25 (B), the jackpot suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, regarding the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the execution ratio between the set values is high between the specific period and the non-specific period. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference between them becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit, which is more reliable than in the non-specific period, is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a specific period, and it is possible to enhance the interest. Not limited to the configuration of the feature unit 112IW, the jackpot suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and may not be executed in a non-specific period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-25 (A) and 9-25 (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit according to the fourth effect mode.

In the feature unit 112IW, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed by the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (A1), the effect symbol that becomes the big hit is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (B1), the dialogue C image (“high setting !?”) 112IW102 is displayed.

Further, when the jackpot suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (A1), after the effect symbol that becomes the jackpot is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, the figure is shown. As shown in 9-27 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 112IW105 is displayed.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 112IWS603). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the jackpot suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1" (. Step 112 IWS 604). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS603 to S604, the feature unit 112IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 9-25 (A) and 9-25 (B), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, the player is disappointed by the big hit suggestion effect being executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the game is played and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS605). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS606). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

FIG. 9-25 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 9-25 (C), in the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining that the jackpot suggestion effect is to be executed is low, and the set values are “2” and “3”. Compared with the above, the ratio of the second effect mode and the third effect mode is determined to be lower, and the fourth effect mode may not be determined.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS605 to S606, the feature unit 112IW sets a disadvantageous set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player, and to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 112IWS607 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted not to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit.

By executing the process of step 112IWS605, the feature unit 112IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the big hit when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. Even though a disadvantageous setting value is set, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed and the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the jackpot suggestion effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the jackpot suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 9-25 (A) and 9-25 (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 9-25 (A) and 9-25 (B), only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-25 (A), when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. You may. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be different depending on the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-25 (B), regardless of the set value, the rate at which the suggestion effect during the big hit is not executed is configured to be the same, but if the rate at which the suggestion effect is not executed differs depending on the set value. You may let it.

Further, in the present feature unit 112IW, when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the big hit middle suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialogue image suggesting a set value is displayed) may be executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of executions of the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect reaches the predetermined number of times, or when a specific super reach effect or a notice effect is executed.

In this feature unit 112IW, it is possible to execute the jackpot suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the jackpot suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect) according to the set value. The execution ratios of the effect mode and the fourth effect mode are different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode are different depending on the set value, and the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) according to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 112IWS607).

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (A1), it is assumed that the movable member 112IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (B2), the movable member 112IW101 is controlled to move to the front surface of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 9-26 (A1) and 9-26 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 112IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 is subjected to the big hit suggestion effect. The position where the dialogue image is displayed becomes difficult to see. In the feature unit 112IW, the suggestion effect during the jackpot and the accessory effect are executed at different timings of the fanfare period in the jackpot game, so that the movable member 112IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is the jackpot. It does not obscure the dialogue image displayed by the medium suggestion effect. However, if the movable member 112IW101 is operated by the accessory effect during the fanfare period, the player may pay attention to the movable member 112IW101 and overlook the dialogue image displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect. Therefore, in step 112IWS607, by using the accessory effect determination table shown in FIG. 9-25 (D), the accessory effect is not executed when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and degrading the interest. Further, with such a configuration, even if the jackpot suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the jackpot suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize.

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the jackpot suggestion effect is performed. (Performed during the ending period), it may be possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the operation mode of the movable member 112IW101 is changed (for example, controlled so as not to stop at a position overlapping with the dialogue image by the jackpot suggestion effect), or the jackpot is hit. The display position of the dialogue image by the middle suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit middle suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit, the execution of the accessory effect may be restricted by lowering the execution rate of the accessory effect. In addition, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 9-25 (D), the accessory effect may be executed at a low rate even when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the light guide plate effect (step 112IWS609) when the accessory effect is not executed (N in step 112IWS608).

Here, a light guide plate 112IW103 having translucency capable of transmitting light and a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end face of the light guide plate are provided on the front surface of the image display device 5, and the light guide plate 112IW103 is provided. It is assumed that the light emitting body is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects the light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 112IW103 from the end surface of the light guide plate 112IW103 and emits it to the front surface of the game machine. Then, by making the light emitting body emit light, it is possible to execute the light guide plate effect of emitting light from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the game machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (B3), light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the game machine, resulting in a “big hit”. Appears. Further, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5 while the light guide plate effect is being executed.

In step 112IWS609, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 9-25 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios depending on the presence or absence of the suggestion effect during the big hit and the effect mode when it is executed. To. Specifically, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is performed. When the effect is executed, the rate at which the light guide plate effect is executed is low. That is, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous set value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to see. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the dialogue A image (“setting is ...”) 112IW104 is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode. If this is done, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the dialogue A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest of the game due to the suggestion effect during the big hit of the effect mode that is not desirable for the player. When the jackpot suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The production may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion production during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

In the feature unit 112IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in such a manner that it is difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed with priority over the jackpot suggestion effect (or pre-game suggestion effect or in-game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, the occurrence of an error can be appropriately notified. Further, when a predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect having a specific effect mode) that can be executed at the same time as the jackpot suggestion effect is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect. May give priority to the suggestion effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect, it is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect. The image may be displayed preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the effect symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the effect symbol is variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having the effect symbol arranged on the surface. It may be applied (that is, it may be applied to a so-called drum type game machine). Alternatively, the effect symbol may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having the effect symbol arranged on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel-type game machine, at the start of the first fluctuation after changing the setting, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation (or characteristic) different from the normal operation. Operation may occur). Therefore, in the initial fluctuation after the setting change, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the rate of execution may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

Further, in the present feature unit 112IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are configured so as to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Further, in this case as well, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when an undesired suggestion is given to the player. For example, when an even initial number is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility of these is reduced. It is also possible to increase the ratio of executing the accessory effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate. Further, the effect is not limited to the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect, and includes a control to output a predetermined sound, a control to vibrate the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control to emit a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined mode. By performing the above, the player's attention may be directed to others to reduce (or make it difficult to notice) the visibility of the initial roll effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect.

Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature unit 112IW, a simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer set at the time of turning on the power or the real-time clock) is executed in a specific mode. May suggest the setting.

In addition, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) suggesting a setting according to the number of times the variable display is continuously executed without the hold memory becoming 0 or the number of times a start winning prize exceeding the upper limit hold memory number occurs. Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Further, a setting suggestion effect (for example, display control of a predetermined image, output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined) suggesting a setting based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during the predetermined operation valid period. (Controlling the light emission of the lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Although the feature portion 112IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

(Modification example 1)
For example, the feature portion 112IW illustrates a form in which the security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 112IW001a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the game machine frame 112IW003 side. May be good. Specifically, as a modification 1, as shown in FIGS. 9-28 (A) and 9-28 (B), a security cover 112IW500B composed of a short piece 112IW500Ba and a long piece 112IW500Bb is attached to, for example, a substrate case 112IW201. The right end of the long piece 112IW500Bb slides left and right between the covering position covering the right side of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 and the uncovering position on the right side of the covering position. Provided so that it can be moved.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500B is slid to the right side with respect to the board case 112IW201, and is set via the through hole 112IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 112IW500Bb. The key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500B (long piece 112IW500Bb) covers the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 112IW201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state by restricting the slide movement to. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the security cover 112IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 112IW201 to release the state of covering the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-28 (A) and 9-28 (B), when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the protruding dimension of the security cover 112IW500B from the board case 112IW201 is length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the protruding dimension of the security cover 112IW500B from the board case 112IW201 is extended to the length L2 by sliding the security cover 112IW500B with respect to the board case 112IW201. (L2> L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (A), when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 112IW500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 112IW201. By sliding the board case 112IW201 until it reaches the length L2 (making the pachinko game machine 1 an allowable state), a pachinko game clerk or the like operates the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052. The set value of the machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (B), the security cover 112IW500B is attached to the substrate case 112IW201 until the protruding dimension from the substrate case 112IW201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not slid to move (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 112IW500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 112IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 112IW003. It has become.

Therefore, in the present modification 1, since it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, the setting key 112IW051 is set by the security cover 112IW500B. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 112IW052, that is, to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

In the state where the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 112IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 112IW001a and the game machine frame 112IW003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left-right direction is restricted. However, the security cover 112IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state of covering the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is maintained by the security cover 112IW500B. ..

(Modification 2)
Further, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the game machine frame 112IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 9-30 (A) and 9-30 (B) as a modification 2, the left end portion of the security cover 112IW500C is provided on the game machine. A coating position that covers the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 and rotation from the coating position are centered on the vertically facing pivot 112IW500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 112IW003. It may be rotatably pivotally supported from the uncovered position. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 112IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 112IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 112IW001a, and the long piece 112IW500Cb is set and switched to the setting key 112IW051. The rotation of the switch 112IW052 from the back surface side to the back surface side may be restricted.

Then, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500C is rotated around the pivot 112IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 112IW201 to obtain the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. It suffices to release the state of being covered with and make it operable. That is, in the present modification 2, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the rotation is restricted with the security cover 112IW500C (long piece 112IW500Cb) covering the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the security cover 112IW500C is rotated around the pivot 112IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 112IW201 to press the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (A), the security cover 112IW500C in the second modification is rotated around the pivot 112IW500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), so that the pachinko game machine 1 is in an allowable state. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by a clerk or the like operating the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (B), the security cover 112IW500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the setting key is set by the security cover 112IW500C. If the 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are not covered (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 112IW500C will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 112IW001a and close the gaming machine frame 112IW003. Is impossible.

Therefore, in the present modification 2, since it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, the setting key 112IW051 is set by the security cover 112IW500C. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 112IW052, that is, to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the feature unit 112IW, a mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame is not limited thereto. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed by opening 112IW003a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 112IW003a in this way, it is shown in FIGS. 9-32 (A) to 9-32 (C) as a modification 3. As described above, the through-hole 112IW003b may be formed in the lower part of the gaming machine frame 112IW003 so that the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 can be operated via the through-hole 112IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are on the side opposite to the mounting surface on the main board 11. Placed on the surface.

When the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 can be operated via the through port 112IW003b, a door body 112IW003c capable of opening and closing the through port 112IW003b is provided, and the door body 112IW003c is closed. The operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 9-32 (B) and 9-32 (C), when the door body 112IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 112IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 112IW003a. Since the 112IW003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 112IW003a and the game machine frame 112IW003 so as to be openable and closable, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be illegally operated when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

As described above, the feature unit 112IW includes the first invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and control of an advantageous state can be executed based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting In a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 112IWSB02-SB04 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 112IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and a portion for executing S601 to S606).
The suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal. As such, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a portion that executes steps 112IWS421, S507, S604).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, in a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 112IWS031 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing, so that the game can be played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. It is provided with suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion that executes steps 112 IWS410, S421, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606 in the effect control CPU 120).
The suggestion effect determining means
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Step 112 IWS410, S505, S602 is executed based on the set value),
When the set value information is not input normally, the execution mode of the suggested effect is determined by using the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value "1") (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Executes steps 112IWS421, S507, S604 based on the set value "1")
It is described that the data capacity may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in the data capacity can be prevented.

In the feature unit 112IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect" is a concept including determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect and also determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect. is there.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time zone. It can give motivation to do it and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 9-6 (A), (B), 9-23 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-23 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 8 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-25 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 9-25 (D)). It is stated that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 9 of the first invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-25 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is stated that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use accessory effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the first invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 11 of the first invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 12 of the first invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, a curity cover 112IW500A / security cover 112IW500B / security cover 112IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the regulating member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 112IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is regulated, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open. The restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. FIGS. 9-2, 9-3, 9-28 to 9-. 31)
It is described that the security may be improved, and the security is improved by such a configuration.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and control of an advantageous state can be executed based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting In a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention that solves the problem.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 112IWSB02-SB04 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 112IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and a portion for executing S601 to S606).
The suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is set to N, S508 in step 112IWS413. When N is N in N, S605, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are not executed.)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, in a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 112IWS031 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing, so that the game can be played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time zone. It can give motivation to do it and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 9-6 (A), (B), 9-23 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-23 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-25 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 9-25 (D)). It is stated that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the second invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-25 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is stated that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use accessory effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the second invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the second invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the second invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, a curity cover 112IW500A / security cover 112IW500B / security cover 112IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the regulating member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 112IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is regulated, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open. The restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. FIGS. 9-2, 9-3, 9-28 to 9-. 31)
It is described that the security may be improved, and the security is improved by such a configuration.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and control of an advantageous state can be executed based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting In a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 112IWSB02-SB04 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 112IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and a portion for executing S601 to S606).
The suggestion effect execution means
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example,). By executing steps 112IWS414, S509, and S606, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode.)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, in a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 112IWS031 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing, so that the game can be played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. It is provided with suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion that executes steps 112 IWS410, S421, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606 in the effect control CPU 120).
The suggestion effect determining means
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Step 112 IWS410, S505, S602 is executed based on the set value),
When the set value information is not input normally, the dedicated decision data (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table) is used. The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table in step 112IWS414. , S509, S606)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time zone. It can give motivation to do it and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 9-6 (A), (B), 9-23 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-23 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-25 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 9-25 (D)). It is stated that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the third invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-25 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is stated that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use accessory effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the third invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the third invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 12 of the third invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, a curity cover 112IW500A / security cover 112IW500B / security cover 112IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the regulating member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 112IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is regulated, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open. The restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. FIGS. 9-2, 9-3, 9-28 to 9-. 31)
It is described that the security may be improved, and the security is improved by such a configuration.

In addition, this feature unit 112IW is configured so that it can be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when it is controlled to the effect mode A, if the set value information is not input normally, It is configured so that the suggestion effect can be executed as if it is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player (the configuration of the first invention described above), and when it is controlled to the effect mode B, the set value. If the information is not input normally, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestion effect (the configuration of the second invention described above), and if it is controlled to the effect mode C, the set value information is input normally. If this is not the case, the case where the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect is executably configured as the suggestive effect (the configuration of the third invention described above) is shown. Not limited. For example, it is possible to switch which of the control methods of the first invention to the third invention described above is used to execute the suggestion effect according to the gaming state. In this case, for example, when the game state is the normal state, if the set value information is not input normally, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect assuming that the set value is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player. The configuration (the configuration of the above-mentioned first invention) is configured so that if the gaming state is a time-saving state, the execution of the suggestion effect is restricted when the set value information is not input normally (the above-mentioned second invention). (Structure) If the game state is a probabilistic state, if the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (configuration). The configuration of the third invention described above) may be performed.

Further, it is not necessary to make the suggestion effect executable by all the control methods of the first to third inventions shown above, and the suggestive effect is made executable by using only one of the control methods. May be good.

In addition, the feature unit 112IW controls the execution of the suggestion effect by the control methods of the first to third inventions described above when the set value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as omission or garbled data (suggestion). Although the case (restricting the production) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the set value command is received but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestion effect may be restricted. In this case, for example, each time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received by the effect control means side is stored, and then when a new setting value command is received, a new setting value command is received. If the set value indicated by the set value command received in is not the same as the set value stored last time, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and the suggestion effect is executed by the control methods of the first to third inventions described above. It may be controlled (restricting the suggestion effect).

Further, the method of differentiating the games in each set value "1" to "3" is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, in the case of odd-numbered setting values such as set values "1" and "3", consecutive villas (a continuous big hit occurs during a probable change state) are likely to occur and consecutive villas occur. It is configured so that there is a large difference from when it is difficult, and in the case of an even numbered setting value such as the setting value "2", the setting value is configured so that the likelihood of occurrence of consecutive villas is relatively constant and does not change. A suggestion effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be feasible. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control methods of the first to third inventions described above. It may be configured to do (restrict the suggestion effect).

The feature portion 112IW also includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-201002, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at least in a period from when the set value is changed until the first variable display is executed, at a different ratio depending on the set value. A game machine that is characterized by being able to execute (such as or initial roll production) is described. According to this feature, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game and plays the game from an early time. It is possible to give motivation to do the game and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying identification information for production (for example, production design).
In the suggestion effect executing means, different effect identification information is displayed according to the set value in the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display (for example, the suggestion effect (for example). It is stated that the odd-numbered initial roll display) may be made feasible, and according to such a configuration, the game interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the game machine is restored after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 9). As shown in -21 (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different determination values is used)
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests a set value after the variable display is started.
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher reliability for the suggested set value than the suggestion effect, and such a configuration can enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-9, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 have a problem that they cannot effectively motivate them to play games and cannot sufficiently enhance their interest. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. Suggestion effects can be executed at different rates depending on the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 9-6 (A), (B), 9-23 (A), (B)).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed (for example, FIGS. 9-6 (A), B)),
It is described that the variable display executing means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to this structure, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 9-6 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times of execution of the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect reaches the predetermined number, and a specific super reach effect. The suggestion effect can be executed based on (for example, the advance notice effect has been executed) (for example, when a big hit occurs within a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit can be executed). See A) and (B))
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-9, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestive effect executed in the past cannot be confirmed and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-23 (A), (B), etc.).
A gaming machine is described that further includes a notification means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect. According to this feature. , It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestion effect has been executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify information about the executed suggestion effect while waiting for a customer for which the variable display is not executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
An information generation means for generating information (for example, execution history information) regarding the executed suggestion effect, and
An image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) in which the information can be read by an imaging device, and
It is described that the specific image may be provided with a display means (for example, an image display device 5) for displaying the specific image in a manner capable of being imaged by the image pickup device. Can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-9, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to be recognized by another effect, the interest may be lowered. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-25 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, it is further provided with a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. (D)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
When the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect overlap, the limiting means changes at least one of the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, one of them is executed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending). Change to run during the period)
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is prohibited. See FIG. 9-25 (D). )
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means executes a predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 112IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the usual one (for example, suggestion during a big hit). Control so that it does not stop at a position that overlaps with the dialogue image produced by the production))
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
Both the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include a display in one display means (for example, the image display device 5).
It is described that the above-mentioned one display means may display the display related to the suggestive effect with priority over the display related to the predetermined effect. it can.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the seventh invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-9, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that the execution of the setting suggestion effect, which is not preferable for the player, may reduce the interest. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and
It is provided with a setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set setting value.
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-25 (A) and 9-25 (B)).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. A game machine that is characterized by having more difficult character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.) is described, and according to these features, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, an accessory effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 112IW101), and according to such a configuration, The effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A light guide plate having translucency capable of transmitting light (for example, a light guide plate 112IW103) and
It is provided with a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end surface of the light guide plate.
The light guide plate is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitting body and emits it to the front surface of the game machine.
The predetermined notification means is capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) that emits light from the reflection portion provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. It is also described that it is good, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing the predetermined notification for displaying an error, and according to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means includes the first setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode. See FIGS. 9-25 (A) and 9-25 (B)), which suggests that the setting is set to the first set value. , A second setting suggestion suggesting that the second set value is set to a second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value (for example, a jackpot suggestion effect of the third effect mode. FIG. 9-25 ( A) and (see (B)) can be executed,
When the first setting suggestion is executed, the predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate than when the second setting suggestion is executed (see, for example, FIG. 9-25 (E)).
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the eighth invention,
It is provided with setting suggestion setting means capable of setting the execution ratio of setting suggestion (for example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the operating means such as the push button 31B and the operating means (management) such as the switch provided inside the game machine. It is possible to change the settings related to the setting suggestion effect by operating)
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the eighth invention,
It is a game machine that displays variable identification information.
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which the identification information is arranged is provided.
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed.
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed. According to such a configuration, it is interesting. Can be prevented from decreasing.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 8 of the eighth invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-9, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the ninth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5).
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
It is a game machine that can play games using the game value,
A game value giving means that gives a game value based on the establishment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value giving means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when it is set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 9-5 (A) and 9-5 (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
It is described that a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting a set value (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) may be provided in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the ninth invention,
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means makes it possible to execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state regardless of a set value. It is described that such a configuration may enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 8 of the ninth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be predetermined according to the set value, and such a configuration makes the gambling too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 9 of the ninth invention,
It is a game machine that can control multiple types of advantageous states.
The game control means can control one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 9-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the ninth invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-9, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the tenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 9-7).
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The variable display period differs depending on the set value (see, for example, FIG. 9-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
It is stated that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be different depending on the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
It is a game machine that can play games using the game value,
A game value giving means that gives a game value based on the establishment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value giving means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period for the variable display is longer when it is set to the second set value than when it is set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 9-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be predetermined according to the set value, and such a configuration makes the gambling too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to a set value (see, for example, FIG. 9-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the tenth invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-9, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 112IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by other feature units such as the feature unit 31AK to configure the game machine. For example, when the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect shown by the feature unit 112IW are executed, a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect. Occasionally, the title corresponding to the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect may be notified in the same manner as the feature unit 31AK.

(Explanation of feature 132IW)
Next, the feature unit 132IW will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 included in the feature unit 132IW is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can act on a specific display related to the movement of the player and the specific display. As a special effect that can be displayed with a special display and suggests that it is controlled to an advantageous state, an effect that the special display acts on a specific display can be executed, and a variable display in which the special effect is executed is started. It is configured so that the special display can be displayed before the game.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 included in the feature unit 132IW is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, includes detection means that can detect the movement of the player, and is related to the movement of the player. A first state in which a specific display can be displayed, a specific effect can be executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition after the display of the specific display, and the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result by the detection means. And a second state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result by the detection means can be controlled, and a special effect of a mode acting on the specific display can be executed in the second state. ing.

Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided in the feature unit 132IW, the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 10-1 is provided.

FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of a decorative pattern prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA1-1 is a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach". ~ Non-reach PA1-4 fluctuation patterns are available. Further, as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach", normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2 and normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 , Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2, and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4, which is used when the reach is not reached and is accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, is re-variated once. Among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2-1 is used, the re-variation is performed once. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2-2 is used, the re-variation is performed twice. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-ream, when Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 are used, the re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation is to temporarily stop the decorative symbol that is temporarily out of alignment from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the display result, and then execute the variable display of the decorative symbol again. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, as variable patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, Normal PB2-3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to Super PA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Fluctuation patterns are available. In FIG. 10-1, the fluctuation patterns of the special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and the special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when a sudden big hit or a small hit is made. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1, among the fluctuation patterns used when the sudden change is not a big hit or a small hit and accompanied by the effect of a pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2-3 is used, the re-variation is performed once. .. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2-4 is used, the re-variation is performed twice. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-ream, when Super PA3-3 to Super PA3-4 are used, the re-variation is performed three times. Further, the fluctuation pattern of the special PG1-3, which is used in the case of a sudden probability change big hit or a small hit and is accompanied by a pseudo-ream effect, is re-variated once.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined by using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and the variation is determined by using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). Determine one of the fluctuation patterns included in the pattern type. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-step lottery process.

The fluctuation pattern type is a group of a plurality of fluctuation patterns according to the characteristics of the fluctuation mode. For example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with normal reach, a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with super reach A, and a fluctuation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into fluctuation pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of the pseudo-ream, and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern without a pseudo-ream, a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of one re-variation, and a re-variation. It may be divided into a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of two fluctuations and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of three re-variations. Further, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be grouped according to the presence or absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a sliding effect.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot, a normal CA3-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern accompanied only by a normal reach, and a fluctuation accompanied by a normal reach and a pseudo-ream. It is classified into a normal CA3-2, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a pattern, and a super CA3-3, which is a fluctuation pattern type with super reach. Further, in the case of a sudden probability change jackpot, it is classified into a special CA4-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern and a special CA4-2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern accompanied by reach. ing. Further, in the case of a small hit, it is classified into a special CA4-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern. Further, in the case of an outlier, there are a non-reach CA2-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern without reach and a specific effect, and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern without reach but with a specific effect. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of shortened fluctuation without reach and specific effect, and normal CA2-4 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with only normal reach. Normal CA2-5, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a pseudo-ream of two normal reach and re-variation, and normal CA2, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a pseudo-reach of normal reach and one re-variation. It is classified into -6 and Super CA2-7, which is a fluctuation pattern type with super reach.

10-2 (A) to 10-2 (C) are explanatory views showing a variation pattern type determination table for big hits. The jackpot variation pattern type determination table sets the variation pattern type to a random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. ) Is a table referenced to determine one of a plurality of types.

In each jackpot fluctuation pattern type judgment table, numerical values (judgment values) to be compared with the random number (random 2) value for fluctuation pattern type judgment are used, and are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3- 3. Judgment values corresponding to any of the fluctuation pattern types of special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 are set.

For example, the variation pattern type determination table for jackpot shown in FIG. 10-2 (A) used when the jackpot type is "normal jackpot" and FIG. 10-2 used when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot". The allocation of judgment values for the fluctuation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different from that of the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in (B).

In this way, when the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables selected according to the jackpot type are compared, the assignment of the determination values for each variation pattern type is different according to the jackpot type. In addition, judgment values are assigned to different fluctuation pattern types according to the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used, and the ratios determined for the same variation pattern type can be different.

As shown in FIGS. 10-2 (A) and 10-2 (B), in this embodiment, in the case of "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", a random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is used. When the value of is 150 to 251 it can be seen that the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

In addition, regarding the super reach jackpot, the fluctuation pattern type with pseudo-ream (variation pattern type including fluctuation pattern of super PA3-3 and super PA3-4) and the fluctuation pattern type without pseudo-ream (super PB3-3, super). It may be divided into the fluctuation pattern type) including the fluctuation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the jackpot variation pattern type determination table for normal jackpot and the jackpot variation pattern type determination table for probability variation jackpot, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream and the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream are not accompanied. The fluctuation pattern type will be assigned.

Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table used when the jackpot type is "sudden probability variation jackpot", for example, when the jackpot type such as special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 is other than "sudden probability variation jackpot". Is assigned a judgment value to a variation pattern type to which a judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the big hit type becomes "sudden probability change big hit" and the sudden probability change big hit state is controlled, it is different from the case of controlling to the normal big hit or the big hit state by the probability change big hit. It can be determined according to the fluctuation pattern type.

Further, FIG. 10-2 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern type determination table for small hits. The variation pattern type determination table for small hits has a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on random numbers (random 2) for determination of variation pattern types when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. A table referenced to determine one of them. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (D), when it is decided to make a small hit, a case where a special CA4-1 is determined as a fluctuation pattern type is shown. ing.

10-3 (A) to 10-3 (C) are explanatory views showing a variation pattern type determination table for detachment. Of these, FIG. 10-3 (A) shows a variation pattern type determination table for deviation, which is used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than 5. Further, FIG. 10-3 (B) shows a variation pattern type determination table for deviation used when the game state is the normal state and the total number of reserved storages is 5 or more. Further, FIG. 10-3 (C) shows a variation pattern type determination table for deviation used when the gaming state is a probability change state or a time saving state. In the deviation pattern type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be an outlier pattern, the variation pattern type is selected from a plurality of types based on the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type. A table referenced to determine one.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-3, a case where different deviation pattern type determination tables are used for the case where the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state and the case where the total number of reserved storages is 5 or more is shown. However, it may be configured to use a common deviation pattern type determination table for the case of the probability change state or the time saving state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 5 or more. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (C), a case is shown in which a common probability variation / time saving variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the total number of pending storages, but the probability variation / time reduction is lost. As the variation pattern type determination table for use, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables for deviation (tables in which the ratios of determination values are different) according to the total number of pending storages may be used.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the out-of-order variation pattern type determination table used when the total reserved storage number is less than 5, and the total reserved storage number is 5 or more. Although the case of using two types of tables, that is, the deviation pattern type determination table to be used, is shown, the method of dividing the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate outlier variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total number of pending storages (that is, for 0 total holding storages, for 1 total holding storage, and for 2 total holding storages). , For the total number of reserved storages of 3, for the total number of reserved storages of 4, ... The out-of-order variation pattern type determination table may be used separately). Further, for example, an out-of-order variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the total reserved storage number may be used. For example, the out-of-order variation pattern type determination table for the total number of reserved storages 0 to 2, the total number of reserved storages 3, the total number of reserved storages 4, and so on may be used.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of out-of-order fluctuation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but the outlier variation pattern type determination is made according to the first number of reserved storages and the second number of reserved storages. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved storage number may be used (that is, the first reserved storage number). For 0 pieces, for 1st hold storage number, for 1st hold storage number 2 pieces, for 1st hold storage number 3 pieces, for 1st hold storage number 4 pieces, and so on. You may use each separately). Further, for example, an out-of-order variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, the out-of-order variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved storage number 0 to 2, the first reserved storage number 3, the first reserved storage number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number is large (for example, 5 or more), the variation pattern type including the variation pattern with a short variation time may be easily selected. .. Further, even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanied by super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

The "specific production mode" is a fluctuation pattern type or fluctuation pattern in which at least the degree of expectation for a big hit is set high, such as a fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach, and the player can have a feeling of expectation for the big hit. Is. Further, the "expectation degree (reliability) for a big hit" indicates the appearance rate (probability) at which a big hit appears when a variable display (for example, a variable display accompanied by super reach) is executed according to the specific production mode. ing. For example, the jackpot expectation when a variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when it is determined to be a jackpot) / (when it is determined to be a jackpot and when it is lost). It is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed in both cases.

In each deviation pattern type determination table, the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3, normal. Judgment values corresponding to any of the fluctuation pattern types of CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 are set.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and 10-3 (B), in this embodiment, when the game is out of order and the game state is the normal state, a random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is used. When the value of is 230 to 251 it can be seen that the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of reserved storages.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and 10-3 (B), in this embodiment, when the game is out of order and the game state is the normal state, a random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is used. When the value of is 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed without reaching at least (without a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect) regardless of the total number of reserved memories. With such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (variable pattern type determination table for loss) is at least a part of the variable display patterns other than the variable display pattern for reach (variable pattern with reach). On the other hand, a common determination is made regardless of the number of rights to be stored by the hold storage means (first hold storage buffer or second hold storage buffer) (first hold storage number, second hold storage number, total hold storage number). Values (1-79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and (B)) are configured to be assigned. As shown in this embodiment, the “variable display pattern other than the variable display pattern for reach” is a variable display result without, for example, a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect. Is a variable display pattern (variable pattern) used when is not a big hit.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-2, a case where a common jackpot variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown, but the current gaming state is a probabilistic state or Depending on whether the time is shortened or the normal state, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table prepared separately may be used. Further, in this embodiment, when the total number of reserved storages is 5 or more, the variation pattern of shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 10-3 (B). Although the case is shown in which the case is configured so as to be performed, the total number of reserved storages (the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) when the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation can be selected according to the current gaming state. The threshold value may be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved storages is 3 (or, for example, when the number of 1st reserved storages or the 2nd reserved storages is 2), it is for shortening. The variation pattern type judgment table for loss is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined, and when the game state is the probability variation state or the time saving state, the total number of pending memories is 1 or 2. Even in the case of (or, for example, even when the number of first reserved memory or the second number of reserved memory is 0 or 1 which is smaller), the variation pattern of shortening variation is selected by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening. It may be decided.

10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B) are explanatory views showing a hit variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the hit variation pattern judgment table, when it is determined that the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit", a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is obtained according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type. It is a table referred to for determining the fluctuation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on (random number 3). The fluctuation pattern determination table for each hit is selected as the table to be used according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table is selected as the table to be used according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is set to special CA4. The hit variation pattern determination table is selected as the table to be used according to the determination result of -1 or special CA4-2. Each hit fluctuation pattern judgment table is a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for the fluctuation pattern judgment according to the fluctuation pattern type, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is "big hit". Includes data (judgment value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case of.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), as the fluctuation pattern types, the fluctuation pattern type including the fluctuation pattern with only the normal reach and the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation pattern with the normal reach and the pseudo-ream are included. It is shown that the types are classified into normal CA3-2, which is a type, and super CA3-3, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by pseudo-reach together with super reach). There is. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), the variation pattern types are a special CA4-1 which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanied by reach. The case where it is classified into CA4-2 is shown. In FIG. 10-4 (B), the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, instead of dividing the variation pattern type according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA4-1 includes the special PG1-1 and the special PG2-1 which are fluctuation patterns without the specific effect, and the special CA4-2 includes the special PG1-2 and the special with the specific effect. It may be configured to include PG1-3 and special PG2-2.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. The out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table fluctuates based on a random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern according to the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is "out of order". A table that is referenced to determine the pattern to one of several types. The out-of-order variation pattern determination table is selected as the table to be used according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

10-6 and 10-7 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Variation pattern command) (corresponds to each variation pattern XX). That is, when each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 10-1 is given a unique number, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the command 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and the type of big hit. Since the effect control CPU 120 determines the display result of the decorative symbol in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or symbol variation designation command). The variation pattern command may include information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the game machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the game machine is restarted. When the power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if the data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, the initialization designation. Send a command.

The command 9F00 (H) is a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, a jackpot start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command is used depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability big hit", and the small hit in the case of "sudden change big hit" or "small hit". / Sudden change big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. Although the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a fanfare designation command for suddenly probabilistic jackpot start designation when it is a sudden big hit, it may be configured not to send a fanfare designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (command for designating the opening of the winning opening) indicating the display during the opening of the winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value for designating the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening, a different command for specifying the opening for the large winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the jackpot game, a command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted and the tenth round during the jackpot game is executed. Is transmitted with a command (A10A (H)) during which the large winning opening is open to specify round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening the large winning opening) indicating the closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value for designating the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for the designated command after opening the large winning opening, a different designated command after opening the large winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the jackpot game, a designation command (A201 (H)) is sent after opening the jackpot to specify round 1, and when ending the tenth round during the jackpot game. Is transmitted a designated command (A20A (H)) after opening the large winning opening that designates round 10.

The command A301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending 1 designation command) for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, designating the end of the jackpot game. The jackpot end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when ending the jackpot game by "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot". The command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the end of the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 100 is configured to send an ending designation command for suddenly probabilistic jackpot end designation when it is a sudden probability change jackpot, but not to send an ending designation command when it is a small hit. May be good.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the probability change state. The command B002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the time saving state.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start prize designation command) for designating that the first start prize has been awarded. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start prize designation command) for designating that the second start prize has been awarded. In this embodiment, the first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command below.

The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total hold storage number designation command) for designating the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number. "XX" in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total number of pending storages. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total hold storage number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the total hold storage number is subtracted by 1. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a total hold storage number subtraction designation command when subtracting the total hold storage number subtraction designation command, but does not use the total hold storage number subtraction designation command. When subtracting the total number of pending storages, a command for specifying the total number of pending storages after subtraction may be sent.

In this embodiment, as a command for designating the number of reserved memories, a case of transmitting a command for specifying the total number of reserved memories is transmitted, but the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory It may be configured to send a command that specifies the number of pending storages that has increased. Specifically, when the first hold storage increases, the first hold storage number specification command for specifying the first hold storage number is transmitted, and when the second hold storage increases, the second hold storage number is specified. The second hold storage number designation command may be transmitted.

Further, in this embodiment, as the hold storage information, a start prize designation command for specifying which of the first start prize opening and the second start prize opening has been won is transmitted, and the total number of hold storages is specified. Although the case of transmitting the command for specifying the total number of pending storages to be performed is shown, the effect control command to be transmitted as the pending storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a hold storage number addition designation command (first hold storage number addition designation command or second hold storage number addition designation command) indicating that the first hold storage number or the second hold storage number has increased when the hold storage number increases. While sending the specified command), when the number of reserved storages decreases, the 1st reserved storage number or the 2nd reserved storage number subtraction specification command (1st reserved storage number subtraction specification command or The second hold storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation commands) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol designation command) that indicates whether or not a big hit is made, whether or not a small hit is made, and the judgment result of the type of big hit among the judgment results at the time of winning. is there. Further, the command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a judgment result (judgment result of the fluctuation pattern type) of which judgment value range the value of the random number for the fluctuation pattern type judgment falls within the judgment result at the time of winning. (Variable category command).

In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing (see FIG. 10-12) described later, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it will be a big hit, whether or not it will be a small hit, and whether or not it will be a big hit at the time of starting winning. Type, fluctuation pattern type Judges which judgment value range the value of the random number for judgment falls within. Then, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating the type of the big hit is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control CPU 120. In addition, a value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variable category command, and control is performed to transmit the effect to the effect control CPU 120. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit, the type of the big hit, and the variable category based on the value set in the symbol designation command. Based on the command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type becomes a predetermined determination value.

FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 10-8, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designation command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

For example, in the winning effect processing described later, when it is determined that the result is "out of place", the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) in which "00 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "normal jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that a "sudden probability change jackpot" occurs, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the result is a "small hit", the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. The EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, the data to be read can be standardized when the symbol specification command is set and when the display result specification command is set.

10-9 and 10-10 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10, in this embodiment, which game state is used, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol, and the variation pattern at the time of starting winning. A value is set in the EXT data and a variable category command is transmitted according to the determination that the value of the random number for type determination falls within the range of which determination value.

For example, when it is determined that the game state is normal and out of order at the time of starting winning, in step 132IWS232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Judge whether or not. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79, the CPU 103 transmits the variation category 1 command in which "00 (H)" is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 2 command in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 3 command in which "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 100 to 169, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 4 command in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 170 to 199, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 5 command in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 200 to 214, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 6 command in which "05 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 215 to 229, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 7 command in which "06 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 8 command in which "07 (H)" is set in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251. In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state, the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is Super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

Specifically, the thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 used to determine which of the above fluctuation categories belong to are shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and 10-3 (B). It is derived by picking up the values that can be the boundaries of the range of judgment values assigned to each fluctuation pattern type in the deviation pattern type judgment table for deviation shown in. This also applies to the subsequent variation categories 9 to 10, 21 to 29, and each variation in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 10-2 (A) to (D) and FIG. 10-3 (C). A threshold value used for category judgment is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of the range of judgment values assigned to the pattern type.

Further, for example, when it is determined that the game state is in a probable change state or a time saving state and is out of order at the time of starting winning, in step 132IWS232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 first sets the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type to 1. It is determined whether or not it becomes ~ 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 103 sets "08 (H)" in the EXT data. Send a category 9 command. Next, the CPU 103 sets "09 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type of Super CA2-7 is used). Send a variable category 10 command.

Even when the gaming state is the probability change state or the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. By doing so, it is possible to assign a common determination value to the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA2-7 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when the processing of step 132IWS232 of the processing of the winning effect, which will be described later, is executed, if it is out of order, the common determination processing may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. Further, in this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for the game state determination process in step 132IWS226.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a "normal big hit" is obtained at the time of starting winning, in step 132IWS232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74. Is determined. When the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 103 sets "10 (H)" in the EXT data. 21 Send a command. Next, the CPU 103 sets "11 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 75 to 149 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is normal CA3-2). The variable category 22 command is sent. Next, the CPU 103 sets "12 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type of Super CA3-3 is used). The variable category 23 command is sent.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a "probability variation jackpot" is obtained at the time of starting winning, in step 132IWS232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. Is determined. When the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern type of the normal CA3-1), the CPU 103 sets "13 (H)" in the EXT data. 24 Send a command. Next, the CPU 103 sets "14 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is normal CA3-2). Send a variable category 25 command. Next, the CPU 103 sets "15 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of Super CA3-3). Send variable category 26 commands.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a sudden change in jackpot occurs at the time of starting winning, in step 132IWS232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. To judge. When the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern type of the special CA4-1), the CPU 103 sets "16 (H)" in the EXT data. 27 Send a command. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of the special CA4-2), the CPU 103 sets "17 (H)" in the EXT data. 28 Send a command.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is obtained at the time of starting winning, the CPU 103 transmits a variable category 29 command in which "18 (H)" is set in the EXT data.

It should be noted that the total number of pending memories is not always the same when the winning judgment is made at the start winning and when the variation display is actually started. Therefore, the variation indicated by the winning determination result specification command. It is possible that the pattern type does not match the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, at least for the fluctuation pattern types of Super CA2-7 and Super CA3-3, a common determination value is assigned regardless of the total number of reserved storages (FIG. 10-2, FIG. (See Fig. 10-3), there is no inconsistency between the winning judgment result and the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation display actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the look-ahead notice effect described later may be executed for the variation display determined at the time of winning when the variation pattern type of the super CA2-7 or the super CA3-3 is obtained. It should be noted that the fluctuation category commands shown in FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10 (specifically, the fluctuation category 8 command and the fluctuation category) are specified only when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern types are Super CA2-7 and Super CA3-3. 23 commands, variable category 26 commands only) may be transmitted, and the variable category commands may not be transmitted in the case of winning determination results of other variable pattern types. Further, when it is determined at the time of winning that the values are other than Super CA2-7 and Super CA3-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted.

Further, in this embodiment, since a common determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA2-1 regardless of the total number of reserved storages (see FIG. 10-3), the look-ahead notice effect (see FIG. It may be configured to execute the so-called look-ahead notice effect).

The "look-ahead notice effect" is a notice effect that is executed before the start of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a case of executing a look-ahead notice effect for changing the display mode of the hold display will be described.

In this embodiment, the process of determining the winning time is executed every time the starting winning is generated, the symbol designation command shown in FIG. 10-8 is transmitted, and the variation shown in FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10. A category command is sent. Then, the effect control CPU 120 gives a notice in advance whether or not it will be a big hit or whether or not it will reach before the change display of the notice target is started, based on the received symbol designation command or change category command. Execute pre-reading notice.

When the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, it is shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13 according to the contents.

For example, the game control microcomputer 100 designates a variation pattern of a decorative symbol each time a start prize is given and variable display of a special symbol is started in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

As a method of transmitting the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 one byte at a time with eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wavy) capture signal (effect control INT signal) instructing the capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of capturing 1-byte data by the interrupt process.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed in a variable manner (variation) of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B, and is produced along with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the effect component such as the image display device 5, it is possible to prevent the number of types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 to increase.

FIG. 10-11 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process in step S101. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 132IWS1211). If the first start port switch 22A is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step 132IWS1222. When the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first hold storage for counting the first hold storage number). (Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (step 132IWS1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step 132IWS1222.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step 132IWS1213), and the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step 132 IWS1214). Further, in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening, the CPU 103 is set to an area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage number counter. , The data indicating the "first" is set (step 132IWS1215).

In this embodiment, when the first start port switch 22A is turned on (that is, when the game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening), the data indicating "first" is set, and the first 2 When the start port switch 22B is turned on (that is, when the game ball starts and wins in the second start winning opening), the data indicating "second" is set. For example, the CPU 103 sets 01 (H) as data indicating "first" when the first start port switch 22A is turned on in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), and sets 01 (H) as the data indicating "first". 2 When the start port switch 22B is turned on, 02 (H) is set as the data indicating “second”. In this case, if there is no corresponding hold storage, 00 (H) is set in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

In the hold specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total hold storage counter value is secured. In the hold specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value of the total hold storage counter value (8 in this example) is secured, and the winning order is based on the winning in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Data indicating that it is "first" or "second" is set. Therefore, in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening is stored. The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 104 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (step 132IWS1216). In the process of step 132IWS1216, a random R (random number for jackpot determination) which is a hardware random number, a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2), and a variation pattern The judgment random number (random number 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random number 3) is not extracted in the start winning judgment process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. May be good. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random number 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

In the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first hold storage number is secured. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer include a random R (random number for jackpot determination) which is a hardware random number, a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1) which is a software random number, and a variation. The pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are stored. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning effect process for determining in advance the variation display result and the variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed (step 132IWS1217). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (step 132 IWS1218), and also controls to transmit the variable category command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 132 IWS1218). Step 132 IWS1219).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 132IWS1220), sets the value of the total hold storage number counter in the EXT data, and produces the total hold storage number designation command. Control to transmit to the control CPU 120 (step 132IWS1221).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 132IWS1222). If the second start port switch 22B is not in the ON state, the process ends as it is. When the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold storage for counting the second hold storage number). (Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (step 132IWS1223). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the second hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the second hold storage number counter by 1 (step 132IWS1224) and the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step 132 IWS 1225). Further, in the hold storage specific information storage area (holding specific area), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating “second” in the area corresponding to the value of the total holding storage number counter (step 132IWS1226).

Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 104 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (step 132IWS1227). In the process of step 132IWS1227, a random R (random number for jackpot determination) which is a hardware random number, a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2), and a variation pattern The judgment random number (random number 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random number 3) is not extracted in the start winning judgment process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. May be good. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random number 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

Next, the CPU 103 executes the winning effect processing (step 132IWS1228). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (step 132IWS1229), and also controls to transmit the variable category command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 132IWS1229). Step 132 IWS1230).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 132IWS1231), sets the value of the total hold storage number counter in the EXT data, and produces the total hold storage number designation command. Control to transmit to the control CPU 120 (step 132IWS1232).

FIG. 10-12 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing of steps 132IWS1217 and 132IWS1228. In the winning effect processing, the CPU 103 first compares the big hit determination random number (random number R) extracted in steps 132IWS12616 and 132IWS1227 with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. 9 (A), and these are Check if they match (step 132IWS220). In this embodiment, at the timing when the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, the big hit type is determined, and the variation pattern is determined in the variation pattern setting process. However, apart from that, at the timing when the game ball starts winning at the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, before the variable display based on the starting winning starts, at the time of winning. By executing the effect processing, it is confirmed in advance whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made, and which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the type of the big hit and the fluctuation pattern type is within. By doing so, the variation display result and the variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed, and as will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 determines based on the determination result at the time of winning. Perform a look-ahead notice effect.

If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step 132IWS220), the CPU 103 is set with a probability variation flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 132IWS221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 103 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps 132IWS12616 and 132IWS1227 with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability variation, and confirms whether or not they match ( Step 132 IWS222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays may be executed between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step 132IWS221 and the time when the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. There is. Therefore, the gaming state changes between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step 132IWS221 or not and the time when the variation display based on the start winning is actually started (for example, the variation start). If a probabilistic jackpot or a sudden probabilistic jackpot occurs before, the normal state may change to the probabilistic state.) Therefore, the gaming state determined in step 132IWS221 at the start winning and the gaming state determined at the start of the fluctuation do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a discrepancy, the one with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the judgment at the start winning is made based on the changed game state. May be good.

If the big hit judgment random number (random R) does not match the big hit judgment value at the time of probability change (N in step 132IWS222), the CPU 103 uses the big hit judgment random number (random R) extracted in steps 132IWS12616 and 132IWS1227 and the small hit judgment value. And to see if they match (step 132IWS223). In this case, the CPU 103 is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) when there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening (when executing the winning effect processing in step 132IWS1217). It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. In addition, when there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening (when executing the winning effect processing in step 132IWS1228), the small hit determination set in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) is determined. Determine if it matches the value.

If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step 132IWS223), the CPU 103 sets the EXT data "00 (H)" indicating that it is "missing" in the symbol designation command. (Step 132 IWS 224).

Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step 132IWS225). In this embodiment, in step 132IWS225, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state and whether or not it is in the time saving state (specifically, whether or not the probabilistic change flag and the time saving flag are set). To judge. It should be noted that, from the time when the start winning is confirmed in step 132IWS225 whether or not it is in the probabilistic state and whether or not it is in the time saving state, there are a plurality of times between the time when the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. Variable display may be performed. Therefore, the game state changes between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step 132IWS225 and whether or not the time is shortened, and the time when the variation display based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, if a probability change jackpot or a sudden probability change jackpot occurs before the start of fluctuation, the normal state is changed to the probability change state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step 132IWS225 at the start winning and the gaming state determined at the start of the fluctuation do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a discrepancy, the one with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the judgment at the start winning is made based on the changed game state. May be good.

Then, the CPU 103 sets each threshold value for disengagement according to the determination result of step 132IWS225 (step 132IWS226). In this embodiment, a threshold value determination program for determining the threshold value is incorporated in advance, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within the range of any determination value. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variable category command shown in FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10 is determined.

For example, the CPU 103 sets a threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is a probability change state or a time saving state. In this case, in step 132IWS232 described later, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 219 or less, and when the threshold value is 219 or less (that is, when it is 1 to 219). Determines to set "08 (H)" as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-9). If the threshold value is not 219 or less (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that "09 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-9).

Further, for example, when the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 103 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 regardless of the total number of reserved storages. In this case, in step 132IWS232 described later, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 79 or less, and when the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 1 to 79). Determines to set "00 (H)" as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-9). Further, when the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, when the threshold value is 80 to 89), it is determined that "01 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-9). Further, when the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, when the threshold value is 90 to 99), it is determined that "02 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-9). Further, when the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, when it is 100 to 169), it is determined that "03 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-9). Further, when the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, when the threshold value is 170 to 199), it is determined that "04 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-9). Further, when the threshold value is 214 or less (that is, when it is 200 to 214), it is determined that "05 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-9). Further, when the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that "06 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-9). If the threshold value is not 229 or less (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that "07 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-9).

In the threshold value determination example shown above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value, so that the one determined by the later threshold value is used. It will never fall below the threshold of the previous order. That is, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, the value is not within the range of 1 to 79 below the threshold value in the previous order, and 80 to 89. It will be determined whether or not it is within the range of. Further, in this embodiment, the cases where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 in ascending order are shown, but conversely, 229, 214, in order from the larger one. It may be determined as 199, 169, 99, 89 and 79. This also applies to the case where the determination using the other threshold values shown below is performed.

It should be noted that the threshold value in the normal state may always be set without determining the gaming state in step 132IWS225. Even with such a configuration, the range of judgment values is common for at least the fluctuation pattern type that is "non-reach out" and the fluctuation pattern type that is "super reach out", so that "non-reach" is used. It is possible to determine whether or not the result is "off" or "out of super reach".

When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step 132IWS223), the CPU 103 uses the EXT data "04 (H)" indicating that it is a "small hit" as a symbol designation command. Performs the process of setting to (step 132IWS227).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a threshold value for small hits (step 132IWS228). In this embodiment, the CPU 103 sets a threshold value 251 and determines in step 132IWS232, which will be described later, that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251). , It is determined that "18 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-10). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data "18 (H)" is set as it is without performing the threshold value determination.

When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step 132IWS220 or step 132IWS222, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps 132IWS126, 132IWS1227. (Step 132 IWS229). In this case, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a when there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening (when the effect processing at the time of winning in step 132IWS1217 is executed). It is determined whether the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot". In addition, when there is a start prize in the second start prize opening (when the effect processing at the time of winning in step 132IWS1228 is executed), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b is used and the jackpot type is set to ". It is determined whether the hit is a normal jackpot, a probabilistic jackpot, or a sudden jackpot.

Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of setting the EXT data according to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step 132IWS230). In this case, when it is determined that the "normal jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 103 performs a process of setting the EXT data "01 (H)" indicating that the "normal jackpot" is obtained in the symbol designation command. Further, when it is determined that the "probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 103 performs a process of setting the EXT data "02 (H)" indicating that the "probability variation jackpot" is obtained in the symbol designation command. Further, when it is determined that the "sudden probability change big hit" occurs, the CPU 103 performs a process of setting the EXT data "03 (H)" indicating that the "sudden probability change big hit" occurs in the symbol designation command.

Then, the CPU 103 sets each threshold value for the jackpot according to the jackpot type determined in step 132IWS229 (step 132IWS231).

For example, the CPU 103 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it determines that it is a "normal jackpot". In this case, in step 132IWS232 described later, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 74 or less, and when the threshold value is 74 or less (that is, 1 to 74). Determines to set "10 (H)" as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-10). Further, when the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, when the threshold value is 75 to 149), it is determined that "11 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-10). If the threshold value is not 149 or less (that is, 150 to 251), it is determined that "12 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-10).

Further, for example, the CPU 103 sets the threshold values 38 and 79 when it determines that the “probability variation jackpot” is determined. In this case, in step 132IWS232 described later, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 38 or less, and when the threshold value is 38 or less (that is, when it is 1 to 38). Determines to set "13 (H)" as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-10). Further, when the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, when the threshold value is 39 to 79), it is determined that "14 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-10). Further, when the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, when it is 80 to 251), it is determined that "15 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-10).

Further, for example, the CPU 103 sets the threshold value 100 when it determines that the "sudden probability change big hit". In this case, in step 132IWS232 described later, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 100 or less, and when the threshold value is 100 or less (that is, when it is 1 to 100). Determines to set "16 (H)" as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-10). Further, when the threshold value is not 100 or less (that is, when it is 101 to 251), it is determined that "17 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 10-10).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the threshold value set in steps 132IWS226, 132IWS228, 132IWS231 and the variation pattern type determination random number (random number 2) extracted in steps 132IWS126, 132IWS1227 to determine which value of the variation pattern type determination random number is. It is determined whether or not it is within the range of the determination value (step 132IWS232).

In steps 132IWS226, 132IWS228 and 132IWS231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 10-2 and 10-3) is set, and in step 132IWS232, the setting is made. The variation pattern type determination table may be used to determine the range of the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type and which variation pattern type is used.

Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of setting the EXT data according to the determination result in the variable category command (step 132IWS233). Specifically, the CPU 103 has "00 (H)" to "09 (H)" as shown in FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10, depending on which variation pattern type is determined in step 132IWS232. , "10 (H)" to "18 (H)" is set in the EXT data of the variable category command.

In this embodiment, even if it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is obtained in the winning determination, the case where the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. If it is determined that the hit is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, a symbol designation command indicating that the winning is determined to be a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted, and a variable category command comprehensively indicating that the variable pattern type is a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. .. Then, for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a variation category command that is comprehensively shown to be one of the jackpot variation pattern types, although it is not indicated specifically which variation pattern type. The look-ahead notice effect described later may be executed based on the receipt of the above.

10-13 to 10-14 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 132IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 132IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 132IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 132IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step 132IWS615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 132IWS616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 132IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step 132IWS618).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step 132IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step 132IWS620).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (commands A001 to A002 (H)) (step 132IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 132IWS622). In this case, for example, if the jackpot start 1 designation command is received, the jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag is set, and if the jackpot start 2 designation command is received, the jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag is set. set.

If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A003 (H)) (step 132IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step 132 IWS 624).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (commands A301 to A302 (H)) (step 132IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 132IWS626). In this case, for example, if the jackpot end 1 designated command is received, the jackpot end 1 designated command reception flag is set, and if the jackpot end 2 designated command is received, the jackpot end 2 designated command reception flag is set. set.

If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end specification command (command A303 (H)) (step 132IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit / sudden probability change big hit end specification command reception flag. (Step 132 IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demo designation command (step 132IWS673), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect display device 5 to display the customer waiting demo screen after 30 seconds (step 132IWS674). .. Specifically, a timer for measuring 30 seconds is set, and when the timer times out, a customer waiting demo screen is displayed on the image display device 5. If a fluctuation pattern command or the like is received during the measurement, the timer is reset and the measurement is terminated.

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol specification commands (step 132IWS651), the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the received symbol specification command in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step 132IWS651). Step 132 IWS652).

FIG. 10-15 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the command storage area at the time of starting winning. As shown in FIG. 10-15, an area (storage areas 1 to 8) corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total number of pending storages is secured in the command storage area at the time of starting winning. In this embodiment, as shown in steps 132IWS1218 to 132IWS1221, 132IWS1229 to 132IWS1232 of the start prize determination process of FIG. 10-11, when there is a start prize to the prize ball device 6A or the variable prize ball device 6B, Within one timer interrupt, four commands, a symbol specification command, a variable category command, a start prize specification command (first start prize specification command or a second start prize specification command), and a total hold memory number specification command are transmitted as a set. Will be done. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-15, each storage area 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area is associated with a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a start winning designation command, and a total pending storage number designation command. A storage area is reserved for storage.

In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order in which they are received in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area. In this embodiment, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the start winning prize designation command, and the total hold storage number designation command are sent in this order within one timer interrupt. Therefore, if the command reception is performed normally, the command is transmitted. As shown in FIGS. 10-15, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the start winning prize designation command, and the total hold storage number designation command are stored in the storage areas 1 to 8 in this order (Note that FIG. 10). In -15, an example in which commands are stored in storage areas 1 to 5 is shown).

In the example shown in FIG. 10-15, the total number of pending storages is specified by specifying the total number of reserved storages 7 in the storage area where up to 7 pending storages are generated in the previous fluctuation display and the latest command is stored. The stored state of the command storage area at the time of starting winning in the situation where the command (C207 (H)) is stored, then one of the reserved memories is exhausted and the variable display based on the second reserved memory is started is shown. ing.

In addition, each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 10-15 is stepped to be described later each time the variable display of the effect symbol is started (every time the total hold storage number subtraction designation command is received). It is deleted from the one stored in the first storage area 1 in 132IWS663, and the contents of the command storage area at the time of starting winning are shifted. For example, when a new effect symbol variation display is started in the stored state shown in FIGS. 10-15, the contents (each command and the change pattern and change timing pattern described later) stored in the storage area 1 are deleted. The contents stored in the storage area 2 are shifted to the storage area 1, the contents stored in the storage area 3 are shifted to the storage area 2, and the contents stored in the storage area 4 are shifted to the storage area 3. The contents are shifted and the contents stored in the storage area 5 are shifted to the storage area 4. The timing at which the content is deleted may be the timing at which the variation display of the effect symbol is started, and the effect symbol variation start process described later may be in progress.

Further, in this embodiment, when the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the start prize designation command, and the total pending memory number designation command received when the start prize occurs are comprehensively expressed, the command at the time of the start prize is also used. Say. In addition, among the commands at the time of starting winning, the starting winning designation command and the total holding storage number designation command, which are commands for designating information that can recognize that the first hold storage number or the second hold storage number has increased, are used. When expressed comprehensively, it is also called reserved storage information. In addition, it is a command that indicates whether or not a big hit or a small hit is determined by the winning effect processing (see FIG. 10-12) at the time of starting winning, the judgment result of the big hit type, and the judgment result of the variation pattern type. When a command and a variable category command are comprehensively expressed, they are also referred to as a winning judgment result specification command or judgment result information.

If the received effect control command is one of the variable category commands (step 132IWS653), the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the received variable category command in the variable category command storage area formed in the RAM (step 132). 132IWS654A). Then, the variable category reception flag indicating that the variable category command has been received is set (step 132IWS654B).

If the received effect control command is the first start prize designation command (step 132IWS655), the effect control CPU 120 updates the total pending storage number display (step 132IWS656A), and executes the received first start prize designation command in RAM. It is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and the variable category command are stored in each storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in (step 132IWS656B).

If the received effect control command is the second start prize designation command (step 132IWS657), the effect control CPU 120 updates the total pending storage number display (step 132IWS658A), and executes the received second start prize designation command in the RAM. It is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and the variable category command are stored in each storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in (step 132IWS658B).

If the received effect control command is a total hold storage number specification command (step 132IWS659), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the received total hold storage number specification command to each of the start winning command storage areas formed in the RAM. It is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command, variable category command, and start prize designation command (first start prize designation command, second start prize designation command) are stored in the storage area (step 132IWS660).

If the received effect control command is a total hold storage number subtraction specification command (step 132IWS661), the effect control CPU 120 erases one hold display in the total hold storage display unit and shifts the remaining hold displays one by one. Then, the total hold storage number display in the total hold storage display unit is updated based on the change pattern and the change timing pattern stored in the start winning command storage area (step 132IWS662).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 132IWS684). For example, if the received effect control command is a customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demo designation command reception flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been received is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 132 IWS611.

FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIGS. 10-16, the effect control CPU 120 performs a mode control process (step 132 IWS800) for controlling the effect mode after step S161, and proceeds to steps S170 to S177.

In the present embodiment, as the effect mode, the auto button function is disabled in principle (details will be described later, but even in the normal mode, the auto button is exceptional when the second normal pre-reading notice is given. The function may be enabled) and the auto mode in which the auto button function is enabled is provided. The "auto button function" is a function in which the push button 31B is not actually operated by the player, but the process is executed assuming that the push button 31B is operated. In this embodiment, the button notice effect is executed during the variable display of the effect symbol, and the notice display is displayed based on the detection of the single operation of the push button 31B in the button notice effect. When is enabled, even if the push button 31B is not operated, the process is executed assuming that the push button 31B is operated once in the button advance notice effect, and the notice display is displayed. In this embodiment, the one-shot operation means that the push button 31B is operated once.

Further, in the present embodiment, the button notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect. The look-ahead notice effect in the present embodiment is performed in a different manner depending on whether it is controlled in the auto mode or the normal mode. When controlled to the auto mode, the first auto pre-reading notice to the third auto pre-reading notice can be executed as a pre-reading notice effect, and when controlled to the normal mode, the first normal pre-reading notice to the second normal pre-reading notice can be executed. The reading notice can be executed as a pre-reading notice effect.

In the first auto pre-reading notice, the half body of the character is displayed from the timing when the hold memory corresponding to the change of the notice target is stored, the character is displayed in the whole body in the change of the notice target, and a button imitating the push button 31B. After the display is displayed, the character is displayed to press the button display, and a specific effect (an effect of displaying characters such as "chance?" In the image display device 5) is performed as a look-ahead notice effect.

In the second auto look-ahead notice, the half body of the character is displayed from the timing when the hold memory corresponding to the change of the notice target is stored, the character is displayed in the whole body in the change of the notice target, and a button imitating the push button 31B. After the display is displayed, it is a look-ahead notice effect in which the character is not displayed to press the button display and no specific effect is performed.

In the third auto look-ahead notice, the half body of the character is displayed from the timing when the hold memory corresponding to the change of the notice target is stored, but the character is not displayed on the whole body and imitates the push button 31B in the change of the notice target. The button display is a look-ahead notice effect that is not displayed.

In the first normal pre-reading notice, the chance display is displayed from the timing when the hold memory corresponding to the change of the notice target is stored, and the button display imitating the push button 31B and the operation to the push button 31B are performed in the change of the notice target. A validity period gauge indicating the remaining period of the validity period to be valid is displayed, and a pre-reading notice effect is performed when the operation to the push button 31B is accepted during the validity period or when the validity period ends. is there.

In the second normal pre-reading notice, the chance display is displayed from the timing when the hold memory corresponding to the change of the notice target is stored, the character is displayed on the whole body in the change of the notice target, and the button display imitating the push button 31B is displayed. After being displayed, the character is displayed to press the button display to perform a specific effect, which is a look-ahead notice effect. That is, although the second normal look-ahead notice is a look-ahead notice effect performed in the normal mode, it is an effect performed with the auto button function temporarily enabled.

Further, when the look-ahead notice effect is performed in the auto mode, the continuous pressing display can be executed in the change performed before the change of the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect is started. The "continuous pressing display" is an effect in which the character is displayed on the whole body and a button display imitating the push button 31B is displayed, and then the character is displayed to press the button display to perform a specific effect. .. That is, when the continuous pressing display is performed, the button notice effect is performed with continuous fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, the valid period for validating the operation of the push button 31b is the first valid period set in the first auto pre-reading notice, the first normal pre-reading notice, and the second normal pre-reading notice. Set by the second valid period set when the color of the button display displayed in the look-ahead notice effect changes from blue to red, and the change before the change of the notice target when the continuous pressing display is performed. There is a third validity period.

When the operation to the push button 31b is accepted in the first valid period (including the case where the operation is accepted by the auto button function), the specific effect is performed. When the operation to the push button 31b is accepted in the second valid period (including the case where the operation is accepted by the auto button function), the color of the displayed button display is changed from blue to red. When the operation to the push button 31b is accepted in the third valid period (including the case where the operation is accepted by the auto button function), the specific effect is performed.

FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-17, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received (step 132IWS3801), and if not, the pre-reading notice setting process. To finish.

When a new start winning command is received, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead flag indicating that the look-ahead notice effect is being executed is set (step 132IWS3802), and if it is set, the look-ahead notice is set. End the setting process. As a result, a plurality of pre-reading notice effects are not executed in parallel.

If the look-ahead flag is not set, that is, if the look-ahead notice effect is not being executed, whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect that targets a new hold memory (hold memory corresponding to a new start winning command). A look-ahead notice execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not (step 132IWS3803). Specifically, the pre-reading notice execution lottery is performed using the pre-reading notice execution lottery table shown in FIG. 10-18 (A).

FIG. 10-18 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a pre-reading notice execution lottery table. In the look-ahead notice execution lottery table shown in FIG. 10-18 (A), the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect is associated with each winning determination result.

For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is a big hit (when the symbol designation command is any one of C401 (H) to C404 (H)), the pre-reading notice effect is executed at a rate of 70%. It is decided at a rate of 30% not to carry out.

For example, when the winning judgment result is out of super reach (when the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the variable category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), the look-ahead notice effect is executed. It is decided at a rate of 40% that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed at a rate of 60%.

For example, when the winning judgment result is out of reach (when the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the variable category command is C600 (H) or C608 (H)), the look-ahead notice effect is executed. It is decided at a rate of 2% that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed at a rate of 98%.

For example, if the winning determination result is other than that, it is determined at a rate of 100% that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed.

When it is determined to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the auto mode flag indicating that the auto mode is in progress is set (step 132 IWS3805). When the auto mode flag is set, the display of the half-body character is started (step 132IWS3806), and the continuous pressing display execution lottery for determining whether or not to perform the continuous pressing display is performed (step 132IWS3807). Specifically, the continuous pressing display execution lottery is performed using the continuous pressing display execution lottery table shown in FIG. 10-18 (B).

FIG. 10-18 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a continuous pressing display execution drawing table. In the continuous pressing display execution lottery table shown in FIG. 10-18 (B), the determination ratio of whether or not the continuous pressing display is executed is associated with each winning determination result.

For example, when the winning judgment result is a big hit (when the symbol designation command is any of C401 (H) to C404 (H)), the continuous pressing display is executed at a rate of 80%, and the continuous pressing display is displayed. It is decided at a rate of 20% not to execute.

For example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach (when the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the variable category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), continuous pressing display is executed. It is determined at a rate of 20% that the continuous pressing display is not executed at a rate of 80%.

For example, when the winning judgment result is out of reach (when the symbol designation command is C400 (H) and the variable category command is C600 (H) or C608 (H)), continuous pressing display is executed. It is determined at a rate of 0% that the continuous pressing display is not executed at a rate of 100%.

If the winning determination result is other than that, the continuous press display execution lottery is not performed because it is determined at a rate of 100% that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the continuous pressing display can be performed only when the hit is a big hit or the super reach is off, but the continuous pressing display is performed even when the non-reach is out. It may be the configuration to obtain.

When it is decided to execute the continuous pressing display, the effect control CPU 120 sets a continuous pressing flag indicating that the continuous pressing display is executed (step 132IWS3809), and holds the total number of remaining fluctuations K of the look-ahead notice effect. The number of memories is set (step 132IWS3810), and the read-ahead flag is set (step 132IWS3811). If it is determined not to execute the continuous pressing display, the process proceeds to step 132IWS3810 without performing step 132IWS3809.

Further, in step 132IWS3805, when the auto mode flag is not set, that is, in the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 starts the chance display (step 132IWS3812) and proceeds to step 132IWS3810.

FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the mode control process (step 132IWS800). In the mode control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a long press operation on the push button 31B for 2 seconds has been accepted (step 132IWS3851), and if so, a read-ahead flag is set. Whether or not it is determined (step 132IWS3852). If it is set, the process proceeds to step 132 IWS3862.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the switching of the effect mode is temporarily prohibited during the execution of the look-ahead notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the push button 31B is displayed even during the execution of the look-ahead notice effect. When the long press operation for 2 seconds is accepted, the effect mode may be switched. If the effect mode can be switched even during the execution of the look-ahead notice effect, the effect content of the look-ahead advance notice effect can be changed when the effect mode is switched during the execution of the look-ahead notice effect. May be good. For example, when the look-ahead notice effect is started in the auto mode and the mode is switched to the normal mode during the execution of the look-ahead notice effect, the character displayed on the half body may be switched to the chance display. On the contrary, when the look-ahead notice effect is started in the normal mode and the mode is switched to the auto mode during the execution of the look-ahead notice effect, the displayed chance display may be switched to the half-body character display. ..

If the read-ahead flag is not set in step 132IWS3852, processing for switching the effect mode (steps 132IWS3853 to 132IWS3861) is performed. In the process for switching the effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the auto mode flag is set (step 132IWS3853), and if it is not set, sets the auto mode flag and controls the auto mode. (Step 132IWS3854), the auto mode effective display indicating that the auto mode is controlled is displayed on the image display device 5 (step 132IWS3855), and the auto mode effective sound effect indicating that the auto mode is controlled is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It outputs (step 132IWS3856) and controls the LED provided inside the push button 31B to a special light emitting mode (step 132IWS3857).

Further, if the auto mode flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the auto mode flag and controls the normal mode (step 132IWS3854), and displays an auto mode invalid display indicating that the control is performed in the normal mode. Displayed in step 5 (step 132IWS3855), the auto mode invalid sound effect indicating that the control to the normal mode is output is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 132IWS3856), and the LED provided inside the push button 31B is set to the normal light emitting mode. Control (step 132 IWS3857).

Further, when 5 minutes have passed from the start of the customer waiting demo display, the effect control CPU 120 resets the auto mode flag and controls the normal mode if it is set (Y, 132IWS3863 in step 132IWS3862). .. As a result, when a new player starts a game, it is easy to be controlled to the normal mode.

FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 132IWS8000). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 132IWS8000 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 132IWS8001). That is, by executing the process of step 132IWS8001 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 sets the chance pattern symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as the temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 132IWS8001. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 132IWS8001, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

For example, when the received display result specification command indicates "normal jackpot" (when the received display result specification command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 120 has three symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of decorative symbols with the same even-numbered symbols. In addition, when the received display result specification command indicates "probability variation jackpot" (when the received display result specification command is the display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 120 has 3 symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of decorative symbols with the same odd-numbered symbols.

If the received display result specification command indicates "sudden probability change big hit" or "small hit" (when the received display result specification command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols such as "135" as the stop symbol. Then, in the case of "off" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, the combination of the decorative symbols with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the image display device 5 is the "stop symbol" of the decorative symbol.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol for the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the decorative symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols with the same symbol on the left, middle, and right) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol. Further, a symbol that reminds us of being in a probabilistic state (odd number symbol in this embodiment) is also called a probabilistic symbol, and a symbol that reminds us that it will not be in a probabilistic state (even symbol in this embodiment) is a non-probability variation symbol. Also called.

Next, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect (for example, a step-up notice effect, a character notice effect, a group notice effect, a button notice effect) on the image display device 5 during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The advance notice effect setting process for determining the above is executed (step 132IWS8002).

Then, when the look-ahead flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs a look-ahead advance notice execution process for setting the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect (Y in step 132IWS8002A, 132IWS8002B).

When executing the variation pattern and the advance notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the advance notice effect (step 132IWS8003). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 132IWS8004).

The process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

If the effect control CPU 120 is determined to execute the advance notice effect, the process table corresponding to the advance notice effect is selected in step 132 IWS8003.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 132IWS8005). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the VDP in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 132IWS8006).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 132IWS8010).

FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing an example of the pre-reading advance notice execution process. In the look-ahead advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the residual variation number K as a new residual variation number K (step 132IWS101), and the residual variation number K after the subtraction. Is 0 or not (step 132IWS102A).

If the number of residual fluctuations K after subtraction is not 0, that is, if it is not the final fluctuation of the pre-reading advance notice effect being executed, it is determined whether or not the continuous pressing flag is set (step 132IWS115). If it is set, the continuous pressing display is set (step 132IWS116). A third valid period is provided for fluctuations in which the continuous pressing display is set.

When the number of residual fluctuations K after subtraction is 0, that is, when it is the final variation of the look-ahead notice effect being executed, a look-ahead notice type determination lottery for determining the type of the look-ahead notice effect is performed (step 132IWS102B). .. Specifically, the pre-reading notice type determination lottery is performed using the pre-reading notice type determination lottery table shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-22 (B).

10-22 (A) and 10-22 (B) are explanatory views showing a pre-reading notice type determination lottery table. In the pre-reading notice type determination lottery table shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-22 (B), the determination ratio of the effect mode is associated with each variable display result.

The look-ahead notice type determination lottery table shown in FIG. 10-22 (A) is a look-ahead notice type determination lottery table for auto mode used when the auto mode flag is set, and is shown in FIG. 10-22 (B). The look-ahead notice type determination lottery table shown in (1) is a look-ahead notice type determination lottery table used when the normal mode flag is set.

First, the pre-reading notice type determination lottery when the pre-reading notice type determination lottery table for auto mode shown in FIG. 10-22 (A) is used will be described.

For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the first auto pre-reading notice is determined at a rate of 80%, and the second auto pre-reading notice is determined at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the variable display result is out of super reach, it is determined at a rate of 95% that it is the first auto pre-reading notice and at a rate of 5% that it is the second auto pre-reading notice.

For example, when the variable display result is out of reach, the first auto pre-reading notice is determined at a rate of 10%, and the third auto pre-reading notice is determined at a rate of 90%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second auto pre-reading notice is configured to have higher reliability for the jackpot than the first auto pre-reading notice.

Next, the pre-reading notice type determination lottery when the normal mode pre-reading notice type determination lottery table shown in FIG. 10-22 (B) is used will be described.

For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the first normal pre-reading notice is determined at a rate of 80%, and the second normal pre-reading notice is determined at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the variable display result is out of super reach, the first normal pre-reading notice is determined at a rate of 95%, and the second normal pre-reading notice is determined at a rate of 5%.

For example, when the variable display result is out of reach, it is determined at a rate of 100% that it is the first normal pre-reading notice.

After step 132IWS102B, when the auto mode flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 sets the third auto pre-reading notice if the third auto pre-reading notice is determined (Y, 132IWS105 in step 132IWS104). .. When the third auto pre-reading notice is set, as described above, the fluctuation ends without displaying the characters and buttons of the whole body. Therefore, in the fluctuation in which the third auto look-ahead notice is set, no valid period is provided.

If the third auto pre-reading notice is not determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs a button / character color determination lottery for determining the color of the button display and the color of the character (step 132IWS106). Specifically, the button / character color determination lottery is performed using the button color determination lottery table shown in FIG. 10-22 (C) and the character color determination lottery table shown in FIG. 10-22 (D).

First, FIG. 10-22 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a button color determination lottery table. In the button color determination lottery table shown in FIG. 10-22 (C), the determination ratio of the button display color is associated with each variable display result.

For example, if the variable display result is a big hit, the blue button display is displayed at a rate of 20%, the red button display is displayed at a rate of 30%, and then the blue button display is displayed. It is determined at a rate of 50% that the button display turns red.

For example, if the variable display result is out of super reach, the blue button display is displayed at a rate of 40%, the red button display is displayed at a rate of 30%, and the blue button display is displayed. After that, it is determined at a rate of 30% that the button display turns red.

For example, when the variable display result is non-reach, it is determined that the blue button display is displayed at a rate of 95% and the red button display is displayed at a rate of 5%.

Next, FIG. 10-22 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a character color determination lottery table. In the character color determination lottery table shown in FIG. 10-22 (D), the character color determination ratio is associated with each variable display result. The color of the character determined here indicates the color of the character of the whole body that is displayed when the fluctuation, which is the object of the advance notice of the look-ahead notice effect, is started.

For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, it is determined that the blue button display is displayed at a rate of 20% and the red button display is displayed at a rate of 80%.

For example, when the variable display result is out of super reach, it is determined that the blue button display is displayed at a rate of 40% and the red button display is displayed at a rate of 60%.

For example, when the variable display result is non-reach, it is determined that the blue button display is displayed at a rate of 95% and the red button display is displayed at a rate of 5%.

When the execution of the first auto pre-reading notice is determined after step 132 IWS 106 (N in step 132 IWS 107), the effect control CPU 120 is for determining the operation mode when the character presses the button display. A lottery for determining the character operation mode is performed (step 132 IWS108). Specifically, the character operation mode determination lottery is performed using the character operation mode determination lottery table shown in FIG. 10-22 (E).

First, FIG. 10-22 (E) is an explanatory diagram showing a character operation mode determination lottery table. In the character operation mode determination lottery table shown in FIG. 10-22 (E), the determination ratio of the operation mode when the character presses the button display is associated with each variable display result.

For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, pressing the button display with both hands is determined at a rate of 80%, and pressing the button display with one hand is determined at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the variable display result is out of super reach, pressing the button display with both hands is determined at a rate of 60%, and pressing the button display with one hand is determined at a rate of 40%.

For example, when the variable display result is out of reach, pressing the button display with both hands is determined at a rate of 5%, and pressing the button display with one hand is determined at a rate of 95%.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first auto pre-reading notice according to the button display color and the character color determined in step 132IWS106 and the character operation mode determined in step 132IWS108 (). Step 132 IWS109). When the first auto pre-reading notice is set, as described above, the character of the whole body and the button display are displayed, and the character is displayed to press the button display to perform a specific effect. .. Further, in the fluctuation in which the first auto pre-reading notice is set, it is determined that the first validity period is provided and that the button display changes to red after displaying the blue button display in step 132IWS106. A second validity period is provided for the fluctuations that have been made.

The second validity period is provided as a period immediately before the first validity period, and the button display that changes from blue to red in the second validity period is continuously displayed even in the first validity period. It becomes. When the first valid period is started, the button display that has changed to red may return to blue.

When the execution of the second auto pre-reading notice is determined in step 132IWS107 (Y in step 132IWS107), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the button display color and the character color determined in step 132IWS106. The second auto pre-reading notice is set (step 132 IWS110). When the second auto pre-reading notice is set, as described above, the character and the button display of the whole body are displayed, but the variation ends without the character pressing the button display.

Further, in the fluctuation in which the second auto pre-reading notice is set, the button display and the character display are displayed, but the first validity period is not provided. Although the first valid period is provided, by temporarily disabling the auto button function, the same display as in the case where the first valid period is not provided as in the present embodiment can be displayed. Good. Further, a second valid period is provided in the fluctuation in which it is determined that the button display changes to red after displaying the blue button display in step 132IWS106.

In step 132IWS103, when the auto mode flag is not set, that is, in the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 performs a button color determination lottery for determining the color of the button display (step 132IWS111). Specifically, the button color determination lottery is performed using the button color determination lottery table described in FIG. 10-22 (C).

It should be noted that the button color determination lottery may be performed using the button color determination lottery table having different button color selection ratios depending on whether the mode is the auto mode or the normal mode. At that time, a button color that can be selected only in the auto mode or a button color that can be selected only in the normal mode may be provided.

When the execution of the first normal pre-reading notice is determined, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first normal pre-reading notice according to the color of the button display determined in step 132IWS111 (step 132IWS113). .. When the first normal pre-reading notice is set, as described above, the button display and the validity period gauge are displayed, and the operation to the push button 31B is accepted during the first validity period, or the first validity period is received. When the period ends, a specific effect is performed. Further, a second valid period is provided in the fluctuation in which it is determined that the button display changes to red after the blue button display is displayed in step 132IWS111.

In the present embodiment, the specific effect is executed even when the operation of the push button 31B is not accepted during the first valid period and the first valid period ends. In such a case, the specific effect is specified. It may be decided not to execute the production.

When the execution of the second normal pre-reading notice is determined, the effect control CPU 120 sets the second normal pre-reading notice according to the color of the button display determined in step 132IWS111 (step 132IWS114). .. When the second normal pre-reading notice is set, as described above, after the character is displayed on the whole body and the button display is displayed, the character is displayed to press the button display to perform a specific effect. It is what is done. In the present embodiment, the operation mode of the character when the second normal pre-reading notice is set is one-handed push, but the operation mode is not limited to this, and the character shown in FIG. 10-22 (E) is used. The operation mode determination may be determined using a lottery table. Alternatively, the character operation mode determination lottery may be performed using the character operation mode determination lottery tables having different selection ratios of the character operation modes depending on whether the mode is the auto mode or the normal mode. At that time, an operation mode of the character that can be selected only in the auto mode or an operation mode of the character that can be selected only in the normal mode may be provided.

10-23 to 10-25 are flowcharts showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first validity period flag indicating that the first validity period is set is set (step 132IWS4501), and if it is set, the step Move to 132IWS4509.

When the first valid period flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the first valid period (step 132IWS4502). Specifically, a specific timing during fluctuation in which a look-ahead notice effect other than the third auto look-ahead notice is set is set as the start timing of the first valid period. When it is the start timing of the first valid period, the button display is started in the set color (step 132IWS4503).

The start timing of the first effective period may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern, or may be a uniform timing (for example, 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation) regardless of the fluctuation pattern.

In addition, since the first valid period is a period after the second valid period, the button color is already red at the start timing of the first valid period in the fluctuation in which the button color changing from blue to red is set. It is something that has changed. Therefore, in step 132IWS4503, the red button display is continuously displayed as it is.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 is in the case where a pre-reading notice effect other than the second auto pre-reading notice is set (as described above, when the third auto pre-reading notice is set, steps 132IWS4503 to 132IWS4508 Since no processing is performed, when a look-ahead notice effect other than the second auto look-ahead notice is set here, the first auto look-ahead notice, the first normal look-ahead notice, or the second normal look-ahead notice is set. (When is set), the first validity period flag is set (step 132IWS4505), and it is determined whether or not the first normal pre-reading notice is set (step 132IWS4506). When the first normal pre-reading notice is set, the display of the validity period gauge is started (step 132IWS4507).

When the pre-reading notice effect other than the first normal pre-reading notice (that is, the first auto pre-reading notice and the second normal pre-reading notice) is set in step 132IWS4506, the effect control CPU 120 has the set color (blue). The whole body of the character is displayed in (or red) (step 132IWS4508).

In the present embodiment, the color of the half-body character displayed in the fluctuation prior to the fluctuation of the advance notice target of the look-ahead notice effect is blue regardless of which of the look-ahead notice effects is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the characters may be displayed in a display mode having different reliability for controlling the jackpot, as in the case of displaying the characters of the whole body.

Further, when the second auto pre-reading notice is set in step 132IWS4504, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 132IWS4508 without setting the first validity period flag. As a result, when the second auto pre-reading notice is set, the button display and the whole body display of the character are performed, but the push button 31B is not processed as being operated. In that case, a specific effect is produced. Is never done. The button display and the character displayed at that time are deleted at a predetermined timing.

In step 132IWS4509, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 132IWS4521 when the first validity period flag is not set. When the first validity period flag is set, the first validity period is started if a look-ahead notice effect other than the first normal look-ahead notice (first auto look-ahead notice or second normal look-ahead notice) is set. After that, it is determined whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed (step 132IWS4511), and if not, the process proceeds to step 132IWS4521. When a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the first valid period, the character is acted (pressed) on the button display in the set operation mode (step 132IWS4512), and the process proceeds to step 132IWS4516. As a result, when the first auto pre-reading notice or the second normal pre-reading notice is set, the push button 31B is automatically operated when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the first valid period. It is designed to be processed as a thing. In the present embodiment, the length of the period from the start of the first valid period to the processing as if the push button 31B is operated is half the length of the first valid period. ..

When the first normal pre-reading notice is set in step 132 IWS 4510, the effect control CPU 120 updates (subtracts) the validity period gauge and displays it (step 132 IWS 4513), and accepts the operation to the push button 31B, or the first When the end timing of the validity period is reached (Y in step 132IWS4514 or N in step 132IWS4514 and Y in step 132IWS4515), the first validity period flag is reset (step 132IWS4516), and the button display, character display and validity period The gauge display is finished (step 132IWS4517), and the specific effect is executed (step 132IWS4518).

In addition, although it is decided that a single type of specific effect can be executed in the present embodiment, it is also possible that any one of a plurality of specific effects having different effect modes can be executed. For example, a plurality of types of specific effects having different reliability for big hits may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a common specific effect regardless of whether the effect mode controlled when the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed is the auto mode or the normal mode. The effect is not limited to this, and the effect mode may be different between the specific effect executed in the auto mode and the specific effect executed in the normal mode.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second valid period flag indicating that it is the second valid period is set (step 132IWS4521), and if it is set, proceeds to step 132IWS4529.

When the second valid period flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the second valid period (step 132IWS4522). Specifically, a predetermined timing during the change in which the look-ahead notice effect other than the third auto look-ahead notice is set and the color of the button display is set to change from blue to red. This is the start timing of the second validity period. When it is the start timing of the second valid period, the button display is started in blue (step 132IWS4523).

The start timing of the second effective period may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern, or may be a uniform timing (for example, 2 seconds after the start of fluctuation) regardless of the fluctuation pattern.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the second validity period flag (step 132IWS4525), and determines whether or not the first normal pre-reading notice is set (step 132IWS4526). When the first normal pre-reading notice is set, the validity period gauge display is started (step 132IWS4527).

When the effect control CPU 120 is set to a pre-reading advance notice effect other than the first normal pre-reading advance notice (that is, the first auto pre-reading advance notice, the second auto pre-reading advance notice, and the second normal pre-reading advance notice) in step 132IWS4526. , The whole body of the character is displayed in blue (step 132IWS4528).

In step 132IWS4529, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 132IWS4541 when the second validity period flag is not set. When the second validity period flag is set, a pre-reading notice effect other than the first normal pre-reading notice (that is, the first auto pre-reading notice, the second auto pre-reading notice, the second normal pre-reading notice) is set. If so, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the second valid period (step 132IWS4531), and if not, the process proceeds to step 132IWS4541. When a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the second valid period, the character is acted (pressed) on the button display in the one-handed pressing operation mode (step 132IWS4532), and the process proceeds to step 132IWS4536. As a result, when the first auto pre-reading notice, the second auto pre-reading notice, or the second normal pre-reading notice is set, it is automatically performed when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the second valid period. The push button 31B is processed as if it had been operated. In the present embodiment, the length of the period from the start of the second valid period to the processing of the push button 31B as being operated is half the length of the second valid period. ..

When the first normal pre-reading notice is set in step 132IWS4530, the effect control CPU 120 updates (subtracts) the validity period gauge and displays it (step 132IWS4533), and accepts the operation to the push button 31B, or the second When the end timing of the validity period is reached (Y of step 132IWS4534 or N of step 132IWS4534 and Y of step 132IWS4535), the second validity period flag is reset (step 132IWS4536), and the validity period gauge display ends (step 132IWS4536). Step 132IWS4537), the button color change display for changing the color of the button display from blue to red is performed (step 132IWS4538). Here, the button display whose color has been changed is continuously displayed even during the first valid period. That is, in step 132IW4503 described above, the red button display is displayed as it is.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the third validity period flag indicating that the third validity period is set is set (step 132IWS4541), and if it is set, the process proceeds to step 132IWS4545.

When the third valid period flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the third valid period (step 132IWS4542). Specifically, the specific timing of the fluctuation in which the continuous pressing display is set is set as the start timing of the third valid period. When it is the start timing of the third validity period, the third validity period flag is set (step 132IWS4543), and the button display and the whole body display of the character are started (step 132IWS4544). Here, it is assumed that both the button display color and the character color are blue.

The start timing of the third effective period may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern, or may be a uniform timing (for example, 1 second after the start of fluctuation) regardless of the fluctuation pattern.

Further, when the third valid period flag is set in step 132 IWS 4545, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the third valid period (step 132 IWS 4546), and elapses. If not, the process proceeds to step 132 IWS8101. When a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the third valid period, the character is acted (pressed) on the button display by pressing one hand (step 132IWS4547). As a result, when the continuous pressing display is set, the push button 31B is automatically processed as if the push button 31B has been operated when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the third valid period. .. In the present embodiment, the length of the period from the start of the third valid period to the processing as if the push button 31B is operated is half the length of the third valid period. ..

After that, the effect control CPU 120 resets the third valid period flag (step 132IWS4548), ends the button display and the character display (step 132IWS4549), and performs a specific effect (step 132IWS4550).

In step 132IWS8101, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 132IWS8101) and 1 subtracts the value of the fluctuation time timer (step 132IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 132IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 132IWS8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 132IWS8105).

Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 132IWS8111), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step 132IWS8112).

10-26 and 10-27 are flowcharts showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special symbol hit waiting process, first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed is set (step 132IWS8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step 132IWS8305. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step 132IWS8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 132IWS8302 is executed. Without fail, the process proceeds to step 132 IWS8305.

When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 controls to stop and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) (step 132IWS8302).

After that, if the look-ahead flag is set and the residual variation number K is 0, the effect control CPU 120 resets the look-ahead flag (Y in step 132IWS8314, Y in 132IWS8315, 132IWS8316).

After that, when neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step 132IWS8302 (that is, when the outlier symbol is displayed), the effect control CPU 120 is the effect control CPU 120 (N in step 132IWS8303). Goes to step 132IWS8311.

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 132IWS8302 (Y in step 132IWS8303), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag (step 132IWS8304) and receives the jackpot start designation command. It is confirmed whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag indicating that the jackpot / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command is received or the small hit / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command reception flag is set (step 132IWS8305). .. When the jackpot start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag (step 132IWS8306).

Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (N in step 132IWS8306A), the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table according to the jackpot pre-effect (step 132IWS8307). Then, the process timer is started by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 132IWS8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, speakers 8L and 8R as the effect component, and the movable body 32 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1). (Step 132 IWS8309). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the big hit (step S176) (step 132IWS8310).

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step 132IWS8303), the effect control CPU 120 resets a predetermined flag (step 132IWS8311). For example, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 120 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process process or the fourth symbol process process. However, for example, since the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process process and the fourth symbol process process, as shown in this embodiment, a special symbol hit waiting process or the like is performed at the end of the variation. It is desirable to reset in the jackpot end effect process at the end of the jackpot. Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 132IWS8312).

Further, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed (Y in step 132IWS8306A), the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit pre-effect (step 132IWS8321).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 132IWS8322), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to data 1, movable member control data 1), an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, various lamps as an effect component, speakers 8L, 8R as an effect component, and a movable body 32 as an effect component). ) Is executed (step 132IWS8323). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step S174) (step 132IWS8335).

10-28 to 10-34 are explanatory views showing a display example of the image display device 5 according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 10-28 shows a display example of the image display device 5 when the first auto pre-reading notice is performed. For example, first, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (A) and 10-28 (B), in a state where the hold memory is not stored, a start prize is generated during the execution of the fluctuation and a new hold memory is stored, and the hold memory is stored. The hold display 132IW01 corresponding to the hold storage is displayed. At this time, the character 132IW02 is displayed half-body by being controlled to the auto mode and determining to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect for the hold memory.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (C) and 10-28 (D), the variation that has been executed ends and the variation that is the object of the advance notice of the look-ahead advance notice effect starts. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-28 (E), the button display 132IW03 is displayed and the character 132IW02 is displayed on the whole body.

Here, when the operation mode of the character is determined to be pushed by one hand, as shown in FIG. 10-28 (F), the character 132IW02 is displayed so as to press the button display 132IW03 with one hand, while the character When the operation mode is determined to be pushed by both hands, as shown in FIG. 10-28 (G), the character 132IW02 is displayed so as to press the button display 132IW03 with both hands. In either case, the push button 31B is performed regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is actually pressed by the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-28 (H), a specific effect is performed by displaying characters such as "chance?". After that, it develops into reach or is out of reach.

FIG. 10-29 shows a display example of the image display device 5 when the second auto pre-reading notice is performed. Since FIGS. 10-29 (A) to (E) are the same as those of FIGS. 10-28 (A) to (E), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the button display 132IW03 is displayed and the character 132IW02 is displayed on the whole body in FIG. 10-29 (E), the character 132IW02 does not act on the button display 132IW03 as shown in FIG. 10-29 (F). In the present embodiment, since the second auto pre-reading notice can be executed only when the jackpot or the reach is off, the reach will occur after FIG. 10-29 (F).

In this way, the effect of the pattern in which the character display acts on the button display (press) (first auto look-ahead notice) and the effect of the pattern in which the character display does not affect the button display (do not press) (second auto look-ahead). By providing a notice), it is possible to perform an unexpected production and improve the interest.

FIG. 10-30 shows a display example of the image display device 5 when the third auto pre-reading notice is performed. 10-30 (A) to 10-30 (D) are the same as those of FIGS. 10-28 (A) to (D), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (E), the button display 132IW03 is not displayed and the character 132IW02 is erased after the variation which is the advance notice target of the look-ahead notice effect is started in FIG. 10-30 (D). In the present embodiment, since the third auto pre-reading notice can be executed only when it is out of alignment, it will be out of alignment after FIG. 10-30 (E).

In addition, in FIG. 10-30 (E), the character 132IW02 may be displayed in a mode of moving out of the display range to make the player recognize that the button advance notice effect is not performed.

FIG. 10-31 shows a display example of the image display device 5 when the first auto pre-reading notice is performed in the pattern of performing continuous pressing display. For example, first, as shown in FIGS. 10-31 (A) and 10-31 (B), in a state where one hold memory is already stored, a start prize is generated during execution of the fluctuation, and a new hold memory is created. It is stored and the hold display 132IW01 corresponding to the hold storage is displayed. At this time, the character 132IW02 is displayed half-body by being controlled to the auto mode and determining to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect for the hold memory.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-31 (C) and 10-31 (D), the change that was being executed ends, and the hold memory stored immediately before the hold memory that is the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect is supported. Fluctuations are started. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (E), the button display 132IW03 is displayed and the character 132IW02 is displayed on the whole body.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (F), the character 132IW02 is displayed so as to press the button display 132IW03 with one hand, and as shown in FIG. 10-31 (G), a character such as "chance?" Is displayed. By doing so, a specific effect is performed and the fluctuation ends. After that, the variation that is the object of the advance notice of the look-ahead notice effect is started, and the display example shown in FIG. 10-28 (D) is started.

FIG. 10-32 shows a display example of the image display device 5 when the first normal pre-reading notice is given. For example, first, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (A) and 10-32 (B), in a state where the hold memory is not stored, a start prize is generated during execution of the fluctuation and a new hold memory is stored, and the hold memory is stored. The hold display 132IW11 corresponding to the hold storage is displayed. At this time, the mode is controlled to the normal mode, and the chance display 132IW12 is displayed by deciding to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect for the reserved memory.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (C) and 10-32 (D), the variation that has been executed ends and the variation that is the object of the advance notice of the look-ahead advance notice effect starts. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (E), the button display 132IW13 and the validity period gauge 132IW14 are displayed. Then, the specific effect is performed by accepting the operation of the push button 31B during the first valid period or by displaying a character such as "chance?" Based on the end of the first valid period. After that, it develops into reach or is out of reach.

FIG. 10-33 shows a display example of the image display device 5 when the second normal pre-reading notice is given. 10-33 (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. 10-32 (A) to (D), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. By shifting to the display example shown in FIG. 10-29 (E) after FIG. 10-33 (D), the second normal pre-reading notice is performed. As described above, since one-handed push is determined as the operation mode of the character in the second normal pre-reading notice, after shifting to the display example shown in FIG. 10-29 (E), FIG. The display example shown in 10-29 (F) will be used.

10-34 (1) and (2) are explanatory views showing a display example when switching the effect mode.

When switching from the normal mode to the auto mode, as shown in FIG. 10-34 (1), a character display such as "The auto mode function has been enabled" is displayed (see step S132IWS3855). This character display is erased after a few seconds.

Further, when the auto mode is switched to the normal mode, as shown in FIG. 10-34 (2), a character display such as "the auto mode function is disabled" is displayed (see step S132IWS3859). This character display is erased after a few seconds.

FIG. 10-34 (3) is an explanatory diagram showing a display example in the case of performing the first auto pre-reading notice when the button color changing from blue to red is determined in the auto mode. First, the color of the button display 132IW03 changes from blue to red based on the display that the character 132IW02 presses the button display 132IW03 with one hand during the second valid period. Next, a specific effect is performed based on the display that the character 132IW02 presses the button display 132IW03 during the first valid period. In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine that the color of the button display changes from blue to red only when the jackpot or reach is off, so that reach will occur thereafter.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the game machine is capable of performing variable display and controlling to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the operation of the player. It is possible to display a specific display (button display in this example) and a special display (character display in this example) that can act on the specific display (in this example, step 132 IWS3806 in the effect control CPU 120). , 132IWS4508, 132IWS4528, 132IWS4544 to display the character display, and step 132IWS4503, 132IWS4523 to display the button display), as a special effect suggesting that it is controlled to an advantageous state. It is possible to execute an effect in which the display acts on the specific display (in this example, the character display is displayed in a manner such that the button display is pressed by executing steps 132IWS4512 and 132IWS4532 in the effect control CPU 120). The special display can be displayed before the variable display in which the special effect is executed is started (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 changes the advance notice target of the look-ahead advance notice effect by performing step 132 IWS3806. The character display can be displayed from the timing when the corresponding hold storage is stored). As a result, it is possible to expect the execution of a special effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, "the special display acts on the specific display" means that the special display has some influence on the specific display. Therefore, it does not matter whether or not the display ranges of the special display and the specific display come into contact with each other. For example, even when a character displayed as a special display shoots an arrow and the arrow hits the button display displayed as the specific display, the special display acts on the specific display.

Further, the "player's action" is not limited to pressing the push button 31B. For example, it may be a player's operation on another operating member such as the stick controller 31A, a player's operation that can be detected by a non-contact type sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor, or a pressing sensor can be detected. It may be an action of a player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the button display can be displayed as a specific display, but the image is not limited to this as long as it is an image related to the movement of the player. For example, an image imitating the stick controller 31A or an image imitating a touch panel may be displayed as a specific display.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display a character display imitating a person as a special display, but the present invention is not limited to this as long as the image can act on the specific display. For example, it may be an image imitating an animal or an image imitating a machine such as an automobile.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined that a single character display can be displayed, but a plurality of character displays may be displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display a single button display, but it may be possible to display a plurality of button displays. Further, the number of characters displayed and the number of buttons displayed may not be the same, and for example, a single character display may act on a plurality of button displays. Further, the reliability for the jackpot may be different depending on the number of characters displayed and the number of buttons displayed.

Further, according to this embodiment, a detection means (in this example, the push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the movement of the player is provided, and a specific effect can be executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (this embodiment). In the example, step 132IWS4518 in the effect control CPU 120 is performed), the first state (in this example, the normal mode) in which the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result by the detection means, and the detection result by the detection means. It is possible to control to the second state (in this example, the auto mode) in which the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, steps 132IWS3854 and 132IWS3858 in the effect control CPU 120 are performed). As a result, it is possible to control the effect according to the player's wishes, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the normal mode, when the operation to the push button 31B is accepted during the first valid period, in the auto mode, the push button is received during the first valid period. (When processing is performed assuming that the operation to 31B is accepted), it was decided to always execute the specific effect, but it is not limited to this, and a pattern effect that does not execute the specific effect even when a predetermined condition is satisfied is produced. It may be feasible.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the "specific effect", it is possible to execute an effect of displaying "chance?", But the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a cut-in notice, a group notice, a dialogue notice, or the like may be performed as a "specific effect". In addition, the development of reach by aligning the left and right symbols may be referred to as "specific production".

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special effect in a plurality of types of effect modes having different expectations for controlling to an advantageous state (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 controls a jackpot). It is possible to display the character display in either the two-handed push with high reliability for the above and the one-handed push with low reliability for controlling the jackpot). As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the production mode of the special production.

As the operation mode of the character, in addition to the operation mode of pressing the button display, an operation mode of scratching the button display is provided, and any operation mode is provided based on the reliability of controlling the jackpot. It may be different whether the character is displayed in. In addition to the movement mode of the character, the character is displayed at the timing when the character display acts on the button display (before the reach development, after the reach development, during the super reach production), and the fluctuation before the change of the notice target of the look-ahead notice production. Whether or not the effect acting on the button display (for example, continuous pressing effect) is executed may be different based on the reliability of controlling the jackpot.

Further, according to this embodiment, a first special aspect (in this example, a half-body character) capable of acting on the specific display and a second special aspect (in this example, a whole body character) that does not act on the specific display. It was decided that the special display could be displayed by either of. Thereby, it can be expected that the display mode of the special display changes from the second special mode to the first special mode.

The specific examples of the first special aspect and the second special aspect are not limited to those described above as long as they can be visually distinguished, and for example, whether or not the character is surrounded by a predetermined frame. They may be different, or they may have the same shape but different colors and transparency.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a specific display by a plurality of types of display modes having different expectations for controlling to an advantageous state (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to a big hit. The button display can be executed in either red, which has a high degree of reliability for, or blue, which has a low degree of reliability for controlling a jackpot.) As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode of the specific display.

In the present embodiment, the color of the button display is different, but the button display is displayed in a display mode in which the lighting mode (whether or not blinking, the length of the blinking interval) of the button display is different or in addition to the color. It may be possible.

Further, according to this embodiment, the case where the specific display and the special display are displayed but the special effect is not executed (in this example, the case where the second auto pre-reading notice is performed) is the specific display. It is controlled to an advantageous state at a higher rate than when the special display is displayed and the special effect is executed (in this example, the first auto pre-reading notice is performed) (see FIG. 10-22 (A)). ) It was decided. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest by giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the present embodiment, the specific effect is not executed when the second auto pre-reading notice is given, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the character display is specified as the one that does not press the button display. The production may be performed.

Further, according to this embodiment, whether or not a hold storage means (in this example, a hold storage buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as hold storage is provided and controlled to an advantageous state based on the hold storage is determined. It is determined (in this example, step S110 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and before the determination, it is determined whether or not to control in an advantageous state based on the hold memory (in this example,). Step 132IWS1217, 132IWS1228 in the game control microcomputer 100), the special effect is executed based on the determination result. The special display acts on the specific display before the variable display is started. (In this example, continuous pressing display) can be executed (in this example, steps 132IWS116 and 132IWS4541 to 132IWS4550 are executed in the effect control CPU 120). As a result, the player can pay attention to the production for a long period of time.

In the present embodiment, the continuous pressing display is continuously executed in the continuous fluctuation, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, it suffices if the character display acts on the button display at least once before the change of the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect, and the hold memory corresponding to the change of the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect is stored. It is not limited to the effect that the character display acts on the button display in all the fluctuations after being memorized and before the change of the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect.

Further, in the continuous pressing display, even if the character display acts on the button display, the specific effect may not always be executed, or the color of the button display may change.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to change the display mode of the specific display based on the special effect being performed (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute step 132 IWS4938. ) It was decided. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the display mode of the specific display changes.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the game machine can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the movement of the player can be detected. A means (push sensor 35B in this example) is provided, and a specific display (button display in this example) related to the movement of the player can be displayed (in this example, steps 132IWS4503, 132IWS4523 in the effect control CPU 120). , 132IWS4544 is displayed to display the button display), and after the specific display is displayed, the specific effect can be executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (in this example, step 132IWS4518 in the effect control CPU 120 is performed). Part), the first state (in this example, the normal mode) that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result by the detection means, and the first state that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result by the detection means. It can be controlled into two states (auto mode in this example) (in this example, steps 132IWS3854 and 132IWS3858 are performed in the effect control CPU 120), and a special effect in a mode that acts on a specific display can be executed in the second state. (In this example, the character display is displayed in a manner such that the button display is pressed by executing steps 132IWS4512 and 132IWS4532 in the effect control CPU 120). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, according to this embodiment, the specific display can be displayed by the first specific mode (blue in this example) and the second specific mode (red in this example), and in the second state, the second state. 2 There is a higher expectation that the special effect using the specific display of the specific aspect will be controlled to an advantageous state than the case where the special effect using the specific display of the first specific aspect is performed. (In this example, the red button display has a higher reliability for controlling to an advantageous state than the blue button display (see FIG. 10-22 (C))). Thereby, it can be expected that the special effect is executed by using the specific display of the second specific aspect.

In the present embodiment, the specific display can be displayed in a plurality of display modes having different display colors, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to display a specific display in a plurality of display modes in which a predetermined image (for example, a mini character) is added or not.

Further, according to this embodiment, the special display (character display in this example) that can act on the specific display is the first special mode (blue in this example) and the second special mode (red in this example). ), And in the second state, the special effect using the special display of the first special aspect is performed when the special effect using the special display of the second special aspect is performed. There is a higher degree of expectation for controlling to an advantageous state than in the case of (in this example, the red character display has a higher degree of reliability for controlling to an advantageous state than the blue character display (Fig. 10-22). (See (D)))). Thereby, it can be expected that the special effect is executed by using the specific display of the second special aspect.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the specific effect is executed in response to the special display acting on the specific display (in this example, the character display acts on the button display in the first valid period). When the display is performed and the specific effect is executed (see FIG. 10-23), and when the change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display is executed (in this example, the character is displayed in the second valid period). There is a case (see FIG. 10-24) in which a display that affects the button display is performed and the button color change display is executed. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the type of effect executed when the special display acts on the specific display.

Further, according to this embodiment, in the first state, it is possible to execute a special effect in which the special display acts on the specific display (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 is the second normal pre-reading notice in the normal mode. Is feasible). As a result, it is possible to expect the execution of the special effect regardless of the controlled state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect in the auto mode does not accept the operation to the push button 31B, so that the effect mode of the button notice effect (for example, whether or not the character displays the button display). It is possible to draw attention to and improve the interest.

On the contrary, the operation to the push button 31B may be accepted even in the auto mode. For example, when the operation to the push button 31B is accepted during the first valid period of the first auto pre-reading notice, the character may be displayed to press the button display to perform a specific effect. Further, in a game machine capable of executing an effect of displaying the character as if the character repeatedly hits the button display as a look-ahead notice effect in the auto mode, the operation of the push button 31B received during the effect causes the character to display the button. It may be reflected in the speed of repeated hits. As a result, the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the button display in a common mode is displayed in the auto mode and the normal mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button display in a different mode depending on the controlled effect mode. May be displayable. This makes it possible to clearly indicate the controlled effect mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the character is continuously displayed from the timing when the hold memory, which is the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect, is stored to the fluctuation corresponding to the hold memory, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the displayed character may be erased once and the character may be displayed again. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the button notice effect is executed each time the character is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the character display acts only on the button display, but the target on which the character display acts is not limited to the button display. For example, the character may be able to act on the hold display or the active display. As a result, when the character is displayed, it is possible to expect which display will be affected by the effect, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, the display mode of the character display can be changed, and the reliability in the button notice effect may be changed according to the change. For example, the reliability in the button notice effect may be increased based on the change in the color of the character display from blue to red. As a result, attention can be paid to the display mode of the character display.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is decided to execute an effect in which the character display acts on the button display as an effect over a plurality of fluctuations, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a variation accompanied by a pseudo-ream, it may be possible to execute an effect in which the character display acts on the button display as an effect over a plurality of re-variations.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific effect is executed based on accepting one operation of the push button 31B during the first valid period, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to execute a specific effect based on accepting a plurality of (for example, 10) operations on the push button 31B during the first valid period. In that case, when the auto mode is controlled, it may be processed as if the operation to the push button 31B is accepted once every predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the auto mode, processing is performed on the assumption that the operation to the push button 31B is accepted when half of each valid period (first valid period to third valid period) has elapsed. I decided to do it, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be processed as if the operation to the push button 31B is accepted at the time when the valid period is started.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine capable of executing a specific effect based on accepting a long press on the push button 31B, in the auto mode, the long press on the push button 31B is started from the time when the valid period is started. It may be processed as a push button.

In the present embodiment, the first valid period and the second valid period are provided separately, but a single valid period is provided and the push button 31B is operated during the single valid period. The color of the button display may be changed from blue to red when it is detected for the first time, and a specific effect may be executed when the operation to the push button 31B is detected for the second time during the single validity period. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect executed in the fluctuation that is the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect and the effect that is executed based on the continuous pressing display in the change before the change that is the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect. It was decided that it was a common specific production, but it is not limited to this. For example, a specific effect is executed in a fluctuation that is a notice target of a look-ahead notice effect, and a highly reliable hold memory is stored based on a continuous pressing display in a change that precedes a change that is a notice target of a look-ahead notice effect. (For example, an effect of displaying characters such as "the chance is near") may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the validity period gauge is not displayed in the look-ahead notice effect in the auto mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the validity period gauge may be displayed as in the normal mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, although the push button 31B is not actually operated by the player, it is determined that an auto button function for executing the process is provided assuming that the push button 31B is operated. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a gaming machine provided with a touch sensor such as an infrared sensor, the touch sensor does not actually detect the movement of the player, but the touch sensor detects the movement of the player. A function to execute may be provided.

Specifically, if the configuration is such that a predetermined effect is executed based on the detection of one motion during the valid period, the touch sensor performs the player's motion when half of the valid period has elapsed. It may have a function of processing as detected. Further, if the configuration is such that the predetermined effect is executed based on the detection of the continuous motion for the predetermined period during the valid period, the detection of the player's motion is started from the time when the valid period is started. It may have a function of processing as.

(Explanation of feature section 31AK and feature section 132IW)
A gaming machine may be provided with both the feature portion 31AK and the feature portion 132IW described above. For example, the size, color, and other aspects of the button display change (see FIG. 8-10) based on the character display acting (pressing) on the button display, or the character display acts (pressing) on the button display. Based on this, the button display may be changed to an image imitating the stick controller 31A (see FIG. 8-11). Further, after the display mode of the button display changes based on the character display acting on the button display or the button display changes to an image imitating the stick controller 31A, a display prompting the player to operate (for example, Character display such as "push" or "close") may be performed (see FIG. 8-11 (K)).

(Explanation of feature section 112IW and feature section 132IW)
It may be a game machine provided with both the feature portion 112IW and the feature portion 132IW described above. For example, the execution rate of the special effect (the effect of the special display acting on the specific display) and the selection rate of the effect mode of the special effect differ according to the set value shown in the feature unit 112IW. May be good. Specifically, depending on which of 1 to 3 is set, the execution rate of the look-ahead notice effect, the execution rate of the continuous pressing display, the decision rate of the look-ahead notice type, the button color decision rate, and the character color. The determination ratio of the character and the determination ratio of the character's movement (see FIGS. 10-18 and 10-22) may be different. Further, it may be provided that a special effect of a mode that can be executed only when a specific set value is provided. As a result, the set value can be suggested according to the effect content.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
An effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect that suggests that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state and has a higher ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state than a predetermined effect is provided.
The effect executing means can display a title corresponding to the suggestion effect, and can display a specific display different from the title during execution of the suggestion effect.
The effect executing means is
The specific display is displayed in a normal mode and a special mode in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal mode by a different ratio depending on which of the plurality of effect results is the effect result of the suggestive effect. With the above-mentioned suggestion effect
The suggestion effect in which the specific display is displayed in one embodiment,
The title is displayed in a normal mode and a special mode in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal mode by a different ratio depending on which of the plurality of effect results is the effect result of the suggestive effect. With the above-mentioned suggestion production
It is possible to execute the suggestion effect in which the title is displayed in one aspect.
The title includes a special title notifying that the advantageous state is controlled.
When the predetermined effect is executed, the title corresponding to the predetermined effect is not displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.